Home

Roland VG-99 Music Pedal User Manual

1. MASTER Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A FX B MODI SLICER MOD2 SLICER PATTERN RATE TRIG SENS MOD1 HUMANIZER MOD2 HUMANIZER MODE VOWELI 2 SENS RATE DEPTH MANUAL LEVEL MOD1 SLOW GEAR MOD2 SLOW GEAR SENS RISE TIME MOD1 DEFRETTER MOD2 DEFRETTER TONE SENS ATTACK DEPTH RESO EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL MOD1 FEEDBACK MOD2 FEEDBACK MODE RISE TIME RISE TIME FB LEVEL LEVEL VIB RATE VIB DEPTH MOD1 RING MOD MOD2 RING MOD MODE FREQ EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL MOD ANTI FB MOD2 ANTI FB FREQI 2 3 DEPTH1 2 3 MOD1 ADV COMP MOD2 ADV COMP TYPE SUSTAIN ATTACK TONE LEVEL MODI LIMITER MOD2 LIMITER TYPE ATTACK THRSH RATIO REL LEVEL Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A FX MODI SUB MOD2 SUB EQ LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN LOW MID FREQ LOW MIDQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN LOW CUT HIGH CUT TOTAL GAIN MOD1 SUB DELAY MOD2 SUB DELAY DELAY TIME FEEDBACK EF
2. A separate publication titled MIDI Implementation is also available It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit If you should require this publication such as when you intend to carry out byte level programming please access the Roland web site http www roland com Exchanging MIDI Messages This section provides a simple description of how MIDI messages are exchanged About MIDI Connectors MIDI messages are exchanged via the connectors described below Connect MIDI cables to these connectors according to the use MIDI Description Connector MIDI IN Messages from other MIDI devices are received here MIDI OUT Messages from the VG 99 are transmitted here About MIDI Channels MIDI allows various different messages to be sent separately to multiple MIDI devices over a single MIDI cable This is possible thanks to the concept of MIDI channels MIDI channels use an approach similar to that of television channels Switching channels on the TV allows the viewer to watch programs from a variety of broadcasters This is because information is transferred over the channel to which both the transmitter and receiver are tuned TV information from many different broadcasting Broadcasting station is sent through an antenna Station A gt Ea Ea B E c Select the channe
3. 2d n NE e o B 5 6 5 6 BOSS BOSS CTL3 CTL4 4 3 5 50 50 When using the VG 99 with an expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack make the settings described on p 154 When using the VG 99 with a footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack make the settings described on p 154 18 Turning On the Power Once the connections have been completed p 16 turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction Turning on devices in the wrong sequence may result in malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices 1 Switch on the POWER switch on the VG 99 s top panel The display changes as described below and after several seconds the VG 99 is ready for normal performance This screen is called the Play screen USER CATEGORY ssa V CGuitar Unless special note is m
4. When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the phaser DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound You can select the same effect for FX 1 and FX 2 Parameter Explanation Range MOD TYPE TYPE PHASER Phaser p 127 FLANGR Flanger p 128 Selects the number of stages the phaser effect n use TREML Tremolo 128 45 This is a four phase effect A light phaser ef fect is obtained FAN Pan p 128 8STG This is an eight phase effect It is a popular T WAH Touch Wah p 129 phaser effect AUTO WAH Auto Wah p 129 125 This is twelve phase effect deep phase OCTAVE Octave p 129 effect is obtained PITCH SHIFT Pitch Shifter p 130 BI PHS This is the phaser with two phase shift cir HARMONIST Harmonist p 130 cuits connected in series PEDALBEND Pedal Bend 132 RATE 2x2 CHORUS 2x2 Chorus p 132 0 100 This sets the rate of the phaser effect MODI ROTARY Rotary p 133 BPM o BPM MOD2 UNI V Uni V p 133 When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be
5. ere ndis 19 REVERB SEND 146 POLARITY 129 REVERB SW eese 126 148 POY BAI asta Pase edad 118 REVERB TIME eee 126 iis sled n en t D eec 140 Poly Compressor 118 in seen s etse enter 141 POLY DIST 1 18 RIBBON 153 Poly Distortion sette 118 RIBBON CONTROLLER 13 31 118 Ribbon Controller 79 5 RIC KE n R NUR E 103 EOD B 31 118 RING MOD 2 1 1 9 00 127 136 POLY FX Buttons esters ote 12 RISE 111 POLY OCTAVE ann 119 RISE TIME 119 125 133 135 Poly Octave AVE ek Rs 119 RISE TIME ARENES 135 E 119 ROTARY 2 2 11 1 1 127 133 Poly Slow Geary ce eite ete hee t
6. 165 Hold Delay 125 HOLD TYPE ens cons loners ter nite etm estes eine 69 164 HUMANIZER nene 127 134 IN CLEVES tert 73 173 Internal Pedal sss 95 Internal Pedal System s 95 J N EE dus T 109 J CLEAN ee ned eed 140 141 K KB Noli tet n ede ie eet eati 117 130 163 Sehen ettet eite etd niea 33 L 103 LCD eedem 12 51 LCD CONTRAST 166 LEMBI 4 ie ceste ette ette 105 107 110 118 120 122 129 133 134 136 137 139 141 143 146 148 152 153 18 6 itr hehehe pts 117 LEVEE DEPTH er rete 125 LEXELT ebore Pei obe tua 130 131 EBVBE2 toic teeth 130 131 LIMITER 2 ertt rettet ees 127 137 LINEZPEIGOBNES ettet ete 47 103 Des 121 142 144 LOW CUT 107 123 126 128 137 148 LOW DEPTH tete enne 132 LOW GAIN 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 UMS 127 A 132 MODZSW 127 LOW MID FREQ 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 MODE 4 110 118 129 134 136 150 164 LOW MID GAIN 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 RR 130 LOW MID 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 N LOIDI 130 LOW PREDLY espere
7. 34 CONTRAST usen 166 CODLEaSE ua eie ie n redeat gode 51 CONTROL ASSIGN eere 82 150 167 CONTROL ASSIGN Button eee 13 CONTROL Buttons 13 Controller Bales 167 Cord HOOK 2 n intem tin et ee 14 COSME 25 ede een eS 11 COSM AMD sienne greens 30 140 COSM AMP Buttons esee 12 COSM AMP SW iiec tni eret 140 COSM AMPS estet rite evene eee ies 25 COSM GTR SW 22 2 0 10000000000000 101 COSM GUITAR 101 105 108 110 115 COSM Guitars peste 25 CRUNCH x d acaso ee ES 140 141 CRYSIL i aan 114 eene eite bv n ite adde es 154 14 GTL4 Eee ore UTE ees 154 CURVE giren 156 175 CUSTOM late tn cett 121 122 141 CUSTOM SPEAKER _ 142 144 CEUSTOM TYPE iiit etes 143 CUSTOMIZE 39 CUTOFF ees et o E nette ire e 115 CUTOFF FREQ eere te teg iT eot tired 110 D D BEAM decns comedet teen e etre 12 151 D BEAM CALIB cerent 176 D Beam Controller eene 77 D BEAM DISAB eere 176 OUT eR ee RS 147 172 D OUT LEVEL 5 55 eiheseeende iuis 147 172 DGIN Jack zt t eed 14 a euis 106 DEERET ete 127 135 DELAY
8. 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the picking attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound 0 100 Adjusts the degree of distortion be tween low and high strings to even out the volume balance LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the output level that is raised by being distorted THRSH TYPE LIMITR 0 100 Adjusts the level to match the signals input from the guitar Signallevels are suppressed when the signals input are in excess of the set level REL COMP TYPE LIMITR 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time from the point at which the signals fall below the threshold lev el to when the effect is no longer applied TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume COMP BAL Compression Balance 0 100 Adjusts the balance of the input levels for the 2nd 6th strings based on the 1st string s inputlevel When this is set to 100 all of the strings are input at the same level The level of the 2nd through 6th strings decreases as the value is lowered 118 POLY FX Poly Effect Chapter 9 POLY OCTAVE Poly Octave This supports playing technique related to octaves When 12STR 116 in ALTERNATE TUNING is switched noise may occur in the octave sound Parameter Range Explanation TOCTAVE LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 This adds sound one octave lower than the original s
9. Microsoft and Windows registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows Vista is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Apple and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been te
10. DIRECT PATCH 1 DBEAM Switches the D Beam on and off You can add a variety of effects to your sounds by moving your hand or the guitar neck within the range of the beam p 76 PITCH Button In addition to changing the pitch of the guitar this can be used for the Freeze function which continuously holds the guitar s tone FILTER Button This changes the guitar s tone e ASSIGNABLE Button Use this to assign different parameters and functions to the D Beam and change the tone in real time 2 LCD Various information regarding the VG 99 is indicated here 3 PATCH VALUE Dial Used to switch patches and change settings values 4 CATEGORY Button Used to select and change categories 5 FUNCTION Knob Changes the value of the setting for the parameter indicated in the LCD 10 11 12 13 14 FUNCTION Buttons Used to select the parameters indicated in the LCD ALTERNATE TUNING Button Sets the Alternate Tuning function p 26 MODELING TYPE Buttons These set the COSM guitar type and tone p 25 POLY FX Poly Effects Buttons These set the poly effects p 31 FX Effects Buttons These set the effects p 31 COSM AMP Buttons Used to make settings for the COSM amp p 30 MIXER Buttons Used to make settings for the mixer p 35 DELAY REVERB Button Used to make settings for the mixer section s delay and
11. DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the Uni V effect LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume VIB Vibrato This effect creates vibrato by slightly modulating the pitch Parameter Explanation RATE 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the vibrato BPM o BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the vibrato RISE TIME 0 100 This sets the time passing from the moment the trigger is turned on until the set vibrato is obtained When a patch with TRIG set to ON is called up the effect obtained is identical to what happens when TRIG is switched from OFF to ON If you want the vibrato effect to be produced immediately after the patches are switched set RISE TIME to 0 TRIG Trigger OFF ON This selects on off of the vibrato It is as sumed that this parameter will be assigned to the footswitch p 49 133 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide SLICER This consecutively interrupts the sound to create the impression that a rhythm backing phrase is being played
12. eae i e 123 Error Messages sseni enei e oaea 186 EXIT BUON O ade 13 EXP PEDA 154 EXP PEDAL Jack tnde edo mme 14 F FACTORY RESET 100 176 BEAT T ce ede e Er Pee 111 FALE TIME ette ee et emen 133 FAVORITE NAME eee 94 FAVORITE SETTINGS tee 91 FB LEVEL ente tte hne 135 0 iie Getreide 52 169 300 Amp Control sess 54 FC 300 CONTROL eee 155 FEED BACK temen eme rte tiet s 148 FEEDBACK 124 138 FEEDBACK DEPTH enne 125 FEEDBACKS edet sitet enin 130 FEEDBACKER nene 127 135 BEET LG 1t eter tee mte erm 114 FEET steep eene und ta ates 114 A 114 BIETER ete ther eed 81 152 153 FILTER ATTACK eene 115 FILTER BASS tins cased Peds 113 FILTER CH eaedem etes 152 153 FILTER CUTOFF 112 114 FILTER DECAY ertet 113 115 190 115 FILTER RESO 112 114 FILER DY PEs 115 PINE Jst bih ette 117 RE ete aee d 130 FNE Beeches 130 i
13. sse 64 Setting the GUITAR TO MIDI Function Patch Parameters sse 67 Chapter 7 Using the VG 99 Connected to a Computer Via USB 71 Before Using the nene nennen tenentes 71 Switching the Driver Mode nter nnne 72 Setting the USB F nctions eee epe nee irr enous ehh ED 73 Setting the Digital Audio Signal Input and Output sss 73 Setting the Direct be erede pieta 74 Recording the VG 99 s Output with a Computer ssssssessseeeeeeeeeerenenenet tenentes 75 Using the VG 99 to Add Effects to Audio Playback from a Computer sss 75 Chapter 8 Other 5 11111 111 76 Changing the Tone in Real Time with the D Beam and Ribbon 76 Adjusting the D Beam CALIBRATION nnne nennen tnnt 76 Disabling D DISABLE n ene nennen n nnne nennen nennen 77 Controlling Sounds by Hand Motion or the Guitar Neck D Beam Controller 77 Adjusting the Ribbon Controller 78 Controlling the Sounds with the Movement of Your Fingertip Ribbon Controller 79 Holding Sounds for Extended Periods FREEZE sss 79 Changing the Pi
14. HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain IN It will have the same phase as pickup FRONT OUT It will be mixed in opposite phase 104 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Parameter Explanation Range STRING PAN 1st 6th 0 100 100 0 This sets the left right pan of each string The pan effect is cancelled if a monaural effect or COSM amp is connected after the COSM GUITAR effect STRING LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 Specifies the output level of each string 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Explanation MIX LEVEL COSM GUITAR 0 100 Specifies the level of the COSM GUITAR NORMAL PU Normal Pickup 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the normal pickup Parameter Explanation Range NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum picked up by guitar pickups Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the guitar sound the way in which the guitar sound decays over time it has very little effect on the guitar sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound SW Noise Suppressor Switch OFF ON Turns the NS effect on off THRSH Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appro priate Adjust this value until
15. lt FEEDBACK 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area STEREO The direct sound is output from the left channel and the effect sound is output from the right channel LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 20 20dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN DUAL S Dual Series This is a delay comprising two different de lays connected in series Each delay time can be set in a range from 1 ms to 900 ms D1 Delay 1 D2 Delay 2 HIGH MID Q Hi gh Middle 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain DUAL P Dual Paral lel This is a delay comprising two delays con nected in parallel Each delay time can be set in a range from 1 ms to 900 ms 20 20dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone LOW CUT Low Cut Filter FLAT 55 Hz 800 Hz This lets you cut the low end component be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect DUAL L R This is a delay with indi
16. FX Effects ADV COMP Advanced Compressor This is an effect that produces a long sustain by evening out the volume level of the input signal You can also use it as a limiter to suppress only the sound peaks and prevent distortion Parameter Explanation TYPE Selects the compressor type BOSS COMP This models a BOSS CS 3 HIBAND This is a compressor that adds an even stronger effect in the high end LIGHT This is a compressor with a light effect D COMP This models a MXR DynaComp ORANGE This is modeled on the sound of the Dan Armstrong ORANGE SQUEEZER FAT When applied heavily this compressor ef fect provides a fat tone with a boosted midrange MILD When applied heavily this compressor ef fect produces a sweet tone with the high end cut STEREO COMP This selects a stereo compressor SUSTAIN 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain ATTACK 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the picking attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume 136 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide LIMITR Limiter The limiter attenuates loud input levels to prevent distortion Parameter Range Explanation TYPE Selects the lim
17. DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect The pan effect is cancelled if a monaural effect or COSM amp is connected after the COSM GUITAR effect 128 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide T WAH Touch Wah You can produce a wah effect with the filter changing in response to the guitar level Parameter Explanation Range MODE Selects the wah mode LPF This creates a wah effect over a wide fre Low Pass Filter quency range BPF This creates a wah effect in a narrow fre Band Pass Filter quency range POLARITY Selects the direction in which the filter will change in response to the input UP The frequency of the filter will rise DOWN The frequency of the filter will fall SENS Sensitivity 0 100 Adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger re sponse With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect FREQ Frequency 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency of the Wah ef fect PEAK Higher values will produce a stronger tone which emphasizes the wah effect more 0 100 Adjusts the way in which the wah effect ap plies to the area around the center frequen cy With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound DIRECT LEVEL 0
18. COSM GTR A The output from COSM GUITAR A is out put COSM GTR B The output from COSM GUITAR B is out put NORMAL PU The normal pickup input is output CHA The output from Channel A is output CHB The output from Channel B is output MIXER DRY The signals that have been mixed with the mixer but before application of DELAY REVERB are output MIXER The signals that have been mixed with the mixer have DELAY REVERB applied are output MAIN OUT The same signals as those from MAIN OUT are output SUB OUT The same signals as those from SUB OUT are output OUT LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume level of the digital audio output via USB to the computer 73 Chapter 7 Using the VG 99 Connected to Computer Via USB Setting the Direct Monitor 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 CATEGORY NAME MISC VLIE IS AECOER OUTFUT W LINKECATGRY HMIZzCc 3 Press F2 USB 4 Press PAGE gt go to Page 2 SYSTEM UE DRIVER DIRECT HODE HDUHNC DISHEL OFF 00 o A 04 ZELECTROFF 2H 5 Change the setting s value with F2 SELECT F3 OFF ON or the F2 F3 knobs Lef gt For more information on signal paths set by the Direct Monitor parameter settings refer to Signal Flow p 183 6 Press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen Parameter Explanation
19. Parameter Explanation 1 20 Select the slice pattern that will be used to cut the sound RATE 0 100 Adjust the rate at which the sound will be BPM o BPM cut When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time TRIG SENS Trigger Sensitivity 0 100 Adjust the sensitivity of triggering With low settings of this parameter softly picked notes will not retrigger the phrase i e the phrase will continue playing but strongly picked notes will retrigger the phrase so that it will playback from the be ginning With high settings of this parame ter the phrase will be retriggered even by softly picked notes 134 FX Effects HUMANIZER This can create human vowel like sounds Parameter Explanation Range MODE This sets the mode that switches the vowels PICK Picking It changes from vowel 1 to vowel 2 along with the picking The time spent for the change is adjusted with the rate AUTO By adjusting the rate and depth two vowels Vowel 1 and Vowel 2 can be switched au tomatically RANDOM Five v
20. the same 62 MIDI messages not being transmitted received 1 Could there be a short in the MIDI cable Try replacing the MIDI cable Are the VG 99 and the external MIDI device connected properly Check the connection with the external MIDI device Are the MIDI channels matched Check to confirm that both devices are set to the same MIDI channel p 58 If you are transmitting from the VG 99 have the settings for transmission been made Check the Program Change message transmission ON OFF setting p 60 and the settings for the controller number to be transmitted p 62 188 Index Symbols OCTAVE LBVEDL rette ee 119 1 LEVEL eene rennen nnne 119 Numerics a 117 T2 STRING ceili ic eee sik 26 28 116 iden Se eh peste tes 117 175 2 2 5 i ie atis 127 132 103 Ach BchGLIP 174 222 60 174 IBS 116 Af BIBAT aae eie reve 146 ASB COPY diti 88 A B EXCHANGE tee e eet 88 dam 26 116 102 105 AC TY PE dina 101 Acoustic Guitar eene nne nenne 105 ADV COMP 5 5 nnno 127 13
21. ER De A am NR 132 MODELING Buttons ees 12 acces EUREN 132 MODLNG TYPE l stone me 101 LOWER BAL tcc hint bte nd Sve 149 MOD ST NEPOS 103 tu uti idee Es 149 MODULE COPY 89 LOWER 149 MODULE INITIALIZE etes 89 103 MON RR 74 173 MS STACK 140 141 M nte dove dust 23 178 MATEO aciei teu dasa tapes UE SNO 177 MU TE m Stara e na 178 BW iore CDM ure bL 177 MAIN LEVEL 147 172 N NEATN d 147 172 MAIN OUT Jacks L MONO R 2 2202 14 CATEGORY Loren n ER OD 91 176 MAIN OUTPUT SELECT etes 177 FAVORITE eoo tette 94 127 128 134 42 166 MASTER iones users ot oM n io 150 guide M 47 MASTER dote 109 PATCH eio 37 163 raamo 150 154 156 174 NAME KEY BPM itti aeo 163 141 NAME KEY BPM Button tees 13 142 144 Noise Suppressor 138 MIC LEVEL besateo noth beastie tua 142 144 145 Normal Pickup Phase 4st cem eiae 43 142 144 145 Normal
22. 13 conce am 106 Patch Numbers 23 PUCEVE ies Anca conn tees OR 107 Patch Volume Level 36 PUE in 103 PATCH VALUE Dial fret 12 24 PU TONE MEMORARE 107 PATE RIN 134 PU TPE tis eit esi 107 70 163 165 171 PVN Aisa bec E E UP d EH 114 165 PWM DDE 114 PCI ade cie ese ai ERE 171 PWM RATE erm tore 114 RM 129 PEDAL BEND ec teretes eter ert 127 132 Q PEDXE POS 1227132 122 Pedal Wah 12000000 2 0000 000 8 8 8 0 41 QUICK TUNER 53 169 PEU GB cede E eI EO 104 R ute toes 127 PHONES Jack 14 Rack Em 99 PICKUP BRIDGE 1st 6th 167 RANGE 129 ood cust ubi 151 153 178 RANGE HIGH 122 150 152 154 156 PIGH uo dee 130 4 44 44 1
23. EQ SW Equalizer Switch 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the normal pickup Parameter Explanation Range NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum picked up by guitar pickups Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the guitar sound the way in which the guitar sound decays over time it has very little effect on the guitar sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone SW Noise Suppressor Switch LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area OFF ON Turns the NS effect on off THRSH Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appro priate Adjust this value until the decay of the guitar sound is as natural as possible LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain REL Release 12 12dB Adju
24. FAT A01 lowercase letters Switch between uppercase letters low E5 A lt gt a ercase letters numbers and characters Press EXIT one or more times to return to the previous screen 42 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Selecting the Divided Pickup Type Matching the Divided Pickup and Normal Pickup Phase 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen Certain peculiarities in the sound may appear when the COSM guitar and normal pickup sounds are mixed If this occurs adjust 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Page 2 this parameter and switch the COSM guitar s phase CTE unas E Ey UE Eius 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings SCALE PHASE 42 display the GK SETTING screen HORMAL HORMNAL NORMAL 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Page 2 3 Use F4 SELECT or the F4 knob to select the 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select the phase pickup type e A NORMAL Leave the phase unchanged 8 GK 3 Specifies the GK 3 REVRSE Invert the phase 2 GK 2A Specifies the GK 2A A ris Setting the Direction for the Piezo pickups are a type of pickup that are installed at the guitar s Qi Q bridge and use piezoelectric elements to determine the string Insta l led Divided Pickup vibrations Make this setting if the divided pickup ha
25. HE 113 SOLO LEVEL tero tete ot e ee 141 143 SOLO SW apod die 141 143 SOURCE eiie nre ped utes 174 erac atte Cetus 142 145 Speaker arise cote ipa eret enm 40 Specifications aate dentata 184 SPEED sus uiua pisos areis e RENS 133 SR rs MM UU ee UN Tod RE 165 Stand date oot cei drei id Ath Gin editiones 98 t seen ere ye 105 STEP RATE 127 STRING shi a e a a A 103 STRING CH Aea idein 175 STRING LEVEL 1st 6th 104 108 109 115 STRING PAN 1st 6th 104 108 109 115 DUB DEI Y 127 138 SUB EQ as 127 177 R 177 SUB LEVEL 147 172 SUB OUT E dane 147 172 SUB OUT Connectors L R 1 c 14 SUB OUT DEVEDB 49 178 SUSTAIN ene 107 112 114 118 120 136 105 108 110 111 116 117 150 154 SW eftt 151 154 156 111 SYNE CLOCK ley 59 170 SIN 102 110 SYNTA TYPE Na 101 SynEhesiZer ade nat qae 110 SYS EX MODE
26. HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique FILTER TYPE 12 dB 24 dB Selects the curve of attenuation in the filter The 24 dB setting has very steep filtering characteristics FILTER ATTACK 0 100 Sets the filter attack time FILTER DECAY 0 100 Sets the filter decay time FILTER DEPTH 50 50 Adjusts the depth of the filter s change When set to a positive value the VCF cutoff frequency shifts from a high value to a low value When set to a negative value the VCF cutoff frequency shifts from a low value toa high value 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Parameter Explanation Range STRING PAN 1 5 6 100 0 0 100 This sets the left right pan of each string The pan effect is cancelled if a monaural effect or COSM amp is connected after the COSM GUITAR effect STRING LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 Specifies the outp
27. Press PAGE to display Page 1 3 Press F4 CTL 4 Press PAGE to display Page 2 The ASSIGN HOLD screen appears ON A 5 Select or OFF for the Assign Hold function with F1 OFF ON or the F1 knob Settings Explanation Current values of controllers are applied when ON patches are called up Stored values at the time of Patch Write of OFF controllers are used when patches are called up Current controller values ignored 50 Limiting the Patches That Can Be Switched PATCH EXTENT Setting upper and lower limits for the patches that can be switched allows you to select only the patches you need 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 2 CATEGORY NAME M MISC tit BEGDEF T FROM 4 Press F3 FROM 5 Set the lower limit of the patch selection with the PATCH VALUE dial and F3 FROM or the F3 knob 6 Press F4 7 Set the upper limit of the patch selection with the PATCH VALUE dial and F4 TO or the F4 knob This setting applies to patches switched with the PATCH VALUE dial control switches or other such controls Adjustments made with a connected FC 300 or external MIDI device are not affected by this setting Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM 7 Adjusting the Screen s Setting the Output Signal Contrast and Level SYSTEM OUTPUT The t
28. Setting HEXA VCO pitch shifts to values such as PITCH 12 up or down an octave 7 perfect fifth or 5 perfect fourth produces a thicker sound like that from a synthesizer You can add further depth to the sound by setting PITCH FINE to 5 thus slightly shifting the pitch of the HEXA VCO OFF ON Turns the VIBRATO function on off lt i By setting VIBRATO SW as the function to be controlled in Control Assign and then switching the VIBRATO SW to ON as you are playing you can apply stronger vibrato at whatever point performance you want You cannot apply vibrato to the HEXA DISTORTION 0 100 This adjusts the rate of the vibrato Raising the value increases the rate DEPTH 0 100 This adjusts the depth of the vibrato No vi brato is added when the value is set to 0 The vibrato deepens as the value is raised With the GR 300 selected as the COSM guitar expression of sounds may become unstable when the Alternate Tuning 12STR is set to ON or when pitches are shifted excessively Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide BOWED PIPE Parameter Explanation FILTER CUTOFF 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The sound gets brighter harder as the value is raised FILTER RESO Filter Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As t
29. The settings made to change a sound are temporary when you switch to a different patch the settings revert to the values in effect before the changes were made If you want to save the changes in the settings carry out the Write procedure If you do not want to save your changes press EXIT to return to the Play screen 1 Press WRITE The Write screen appears FAP NRE a AAi adita YES CHRITEI HO 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to select the save destination patch number 3 save the patch press WRITE NOW WRITING is displayed while the patch is being saved and then the Play screen returns to the display HOM WRITING Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen 38 Chapter 3 Creating Your Own Effect Types CUSTOMIZE The Customize function allows you to make even more detailed 9 f you want to save the edited settings changes to settings for COSM AMP Preamp section Speaker perform the Write procedure p 38 section Overdrive Distortion and Pedal Wah just like designing f not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen your own original effects processors Customizing the Preamp 1 Press COSM AMP The COSM AMP Edit screen appears 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 A COSM AMP a nmi FREAMF 3 Select CUSTOM as the PREAMP TYPE with F2 SELECT or the
30. e en deae 37 Saving a Patch WRITE ohen entente eate rena DD rene edge dt teet 38 Chapter 3 Creating Your Own Effect Types CUSTOMIZE 39 Customizing the Preamp ee ede nete d ere de RR RR taa ee Rte dn tei estes 39 Customizing the Spekes netter nenne tenens 40 Customizing the Overdrive 2 40 Customizing Pedal Wah 41 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM 42 Inputting the Divided Pickup Settings nennen 42 Selecting the S ttings i dece em EU B deett dede etes 42 Naming Settings GRKNAME ressas tenente NE VEE nenne 42 Selecting the Divided Pickup 43 Inputting the Guitar s Scale eet eee rete teste ie enn dei edes 43 Matching the Divided Pickup and Normal Pickup Phase sss 43 Setting the Direction for the Installed Divided Pickup sss 43 Setting the DOWN S1 UP S2 Switch Arrangement sse een 44 Setting the Gap Between the Pickup and the Bridge PICKUP 44 Adjusting the Sensitivity for Each 45 Setting Whether or Not the Deviced Pickup Is Used GK 45 Using Diff
31. sese tnter trennen 150 PANEL CTL1 CTL2 Control Button 1 2 sees 151 D BEAM intet reet aet ctm ed beim o deos eunt tee enge degens 151 RIBBON 5a UR EDI Ote DO PO OUR HO ER Nd 153 EXP PEDAL Expression ettet tee rte te tete tenes 154 CIL3 TTA Control3 Control nie e eH Es 154 300 CONTROL nitet ee tube entes 155 ASSIGN a pto nbi e b tete eet e o ebbe 155 DIREGT EDIT oe e tede tle e ep e Sei eee ede o ete 156 GUTLAR rg ett pet RR POE BC pie aside 164 166 Parameters That Be Assigned to Separate 2 168 NEEINKPACEGED ced ca a can ro 174 V LINK SYSTEM heres baden tid ubi 176 GDLOBAI 177 irc roh rnit ui cdita SSD Se pedo A Vea np 178 Chapter 10 Appendices 2 eene enne nnne 179 MIDI Implementation Chatti ees aen oaa enne tenente nennen tenens 179 Sigal POW M M H S 183 Spe cificatiofis ien eid e ORC p RR OM bid dk ve
32. 50 50 This sets the amount the pitch that each sec ondary string is shifted relative to the re spective main string in one cent 1 100 of a semitone increments LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 Adjusts the volume level for each secondary string DELAY 1st 6th 0 100ms Adjusts the time the sound of each second ary string is delayed relative to the respec tive main string IR With conventional twelve string guitars the 1st and 2nd secondary strings are tuned to the same pitch as the main strings while the 3rd through 6th are tuned one octave higher Slightly raising the FINE settings and adding a little delay produces a more realistic twelve string sound Parameter Explanation DETUNE SW OFF ON This setting switches DETUNE function on and off 1st 6th 50 50 This sets the shift in pitch in one cent 1 100 of a half step units IL When playing both COSM GUITAR A and COSM GUITAR B slightly detuning produces an effect resembling double tracking a recording technique whereby the same phrase is recorded twice on separate tracks creating a sound with greater breadth and depth Using PAN in the MIXER section to pan A to the left and B to the right further emphasizes the effect HARMO Harmony SW OFF ON This setting switches HARMO function on and off KEY C G m Specify the key of the song you are playing lt
33. Chapter 9 Parameters Guide RING MOD Ring Modulator This creates a bell like sound by ring modulating the guitar sound with the signal from the internal oscillator The sound can be unmusical and lack distinctive pitches Explanation Range MODE This selects the mode for the ring modulator NORMAL This is a normal ring modulator INTELLIGENT By ring modulating the input signal a bell like sound is created The intelligent ring modulator changes the oscillation frequen cy according to the pitch of the input sound and therefore produces a sound with the sense of pitch which is quite different from Normal This effect does not give a satisfac tory result if the pitch of the guitar sound is not correctly detected So you must use sin gle notes not chords FREQ Frequency 0 100 Adjusts the frequency of the internal oscilla tor EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound ANTI FB Anti feedback This prevents the acoustic feedback that can be produced by the body resonances of a guitar Parameter Explanation Range 1 3 Frequency 1 3 0 100 Set the fixed frequency point at which feed back will be cancelled You can set up to three cancellation points DEPTH1 3 0 100 Adjusts the degree of the anti feedback at each of the three cancellation points
34. Cutoff General Purpose 6 om ew es be Tremolo ch A amp ch B CC 1 Modulation CC 71 Resonance CC 74 Cutoff CC 72 Release CC 91 Reverb CC 92 Tremolo VFX 4 CC 93 Chorus OUTPUT FADE CC 10 Panpot DUAL STREAM CC 64 Hold 1 182 Chapter 10 BAIT LNO NO ino asn m al d ans gt 1o ans ino na 5 1997138 ye 9 8 wsoo Eii mw T poU v wsoo 0 0 lt oe 0 5 lt Ino ans 1no 915 gt S3NOHd 1no gt 335m W3XIN Z 100 8sn HART 100 9 1ndino 9 no NV P e Lie Gas NON 1 a p gt o WSOO 1 gt 2 LONNOO HO 1no X4A10d X4A10d vino NI __HVLIND anas Nas i T Su3AdH AVISG H i 1 WwWSOJ Nd WNHON ap i V dn oid 59 WDSS 66 DA 183 Chapter 10 Appendices Specifications VG 99 V Guitar System AD Conversion 24 bits AF method DA Conversion 24 bits Sampling Frequency 44 1 kHz Program Memories 400 200 User 200 Preset Nominal Inp
35. Explanation POLY COMP Select the poly effect type MODE POLY DIST j POLY OCTAVE The parameters that can be set differ with Selects the type of distortion each type Refer to each of the parameters 5 5 A classical overdrive sound is obtained TURBO OD Allows you to obtain a rich effect just like POLYFX CH Poly Effect Channel distortion without losing the subtle nuance A B This selects the channel to which the POLY of the overdrive FX are applied DS1 Allows you to obtain a standard distortion sound POLY Poly Com pre 6 sor DS2 Allows you to obtain a distortion sound with a rich middle The compressor is an effect that attenuates loud input levels FUZZ This produces a basic fuzz sound and boosts soft input levels thus evening out the volume to DRIVE create sustain without distortion 0 100 This sets the degree of sound distortion Explanation HIGH CUT lt 700Hz 11 0kHz FLAT Adjusts the tone of the distorted sound POLY BAL Poly Balance elect the compressor type P 0 100 Adjusts the degree of distortion for COMP The effect will function as a compressor chordal playing LIMITR The effect will function as a limiter SUSTAIN COMP TYPE COMP DRIVE BAL Drive Balance 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain ATTACK COMP TYPE
36. Explanation Range WAVE SHAPE 0 100 Adjusts the curve for the volume change Raising the value makes the changes occur more rapidly RATE 0 100 Adjusts the frequency speed of the change BPM o BPM 2 When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect PAN With the volume level of the left and right sides alternately changing when playing sound in stereo you can get an effect that makes the guitar sound appear to fly back and forth between the speakers Parameter Explanation Range WAVE SHAPE 0 100 Adjusts the curve for the volume change Raising the value makes the changes occur more rapidly RATE 0 100 Adjusts the frequency speed of the change BPM o BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time
37. In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT Depending on the material and temperature of the surface SAFELY on page 2 3 please read and observe the on which you place the unit its rubber feet may discolor following or mar the surface Power Supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air conditioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise m
38. Is each effect set correctly Use the Meter function p 34 in CHAIN to confirm the output level of each effect If the meter for any effect is not fluctuating check the settings for that effect Are volume parameters such as GUITAR VOLUME FV LEVEL and PATCH LEVEL set to the assigned targets Operate these in accordance with the sources Are the OUTPUT settings properly made Check the output settings for SYSTEM OUTPUT and MIXER OUTPUT If there are no sounds through USB are the SYSTEM USB settings correct Adjust the settings to the appropriate values p 73 p 173 If there are no sounds through USB is SYSTEM SETTING correctly set When GK CONNCT is set to OFF or if the divided pickup is not connected audio input via USB may not be output Be sure to set the appropriate value p 166 Is the SYSTEM USB DIRECT MON p 173 switched off Set this to ON Low volume for device connected to INPUT Could you be using an audio cable that incorporates resistor Use only connecting cables such as one from the Roland PCS Series that don t contain a resistor Oscillating sound audible ua Are gain values volume related parameter values in the effect settings set too high Lower the values Is SYSTEM USB USB IN p 173 set to anything other than OFF When set to anything other than OFF the software settings may cause loo
39. MON CMD Monitor Command This setting determines whether or not the command the Direct Monitor command controlling the Direct Monitor described later setting is enabled DISABL The Direct Monitor command is disabled maintaining the Direct Monitor mode set by the VG 99 ENABLE The Direct Monitor command is enabled al lowing the Direct Monitor mode to be switched from an external device DIRECT MON Direct Monitor Switches the output of the VG 99 sound to the PHONES jack MAIN OUT jacks or SUB OUT jacks Audio IN Audio OUT Audio signal VG 99 V Guitar System VG 99 sound MAIN or SUB OFF Set this to Off if transmitting audio data in ternally through a computer Thru ON The VG 99 sound is output Set this to On when using the VG 99 as a standalone de vice without connecting to a computer only USB IN input sound will be output if this is set to Off This setting cannot be saved It is set to ON when the power is turned on Ifyou are using the special driver you can control DIRECT MON On Off from ASIO 2 0 compatible application Chapter 7 Using the VG 99 Connected to a Computer Via USB Recording the VG 99 s Using the VG 99 to Add Effects to Audio Playback Output with a Computer In the computer application set the audio input port to the VG 99 from puter You can freely set the point at
40. TUNING BEND When set to OFF you can use set COSM GUITAR A differently than COSM GUI TAR B Unless you particularly want to change the TUNING or BEND settings for COSM GUITAR A and 5 GUITAR B leaving AB LINK set to ON is normally more convenient A B A B This selects the channel used in setting Al ternate Tuning You cannot set this when AB LINK is on TUNING SW OFF ON This setting switches TUNING function on and off TYPE You can create and use your own original harmonies in each individ ual patch with the USER TYPE function OPEN D This tuning produces a D chord when the strings are played open OPEN E This tuning produces an E chord when the strings are played open OPEN G This tuning produces a G chord when the strings are played open OPEN A This tuning produces an A chord when the strings are played open DROP D This tuning drops the note only on the 6th string D D MODAL Also referred to as DADGAD this tuning drops the 6th 2nd and 1st strings one note lending the sounds an exotic air 1 STEP This tuning lowers the strings one semitone half step All strings are lowered a semitone corre sponding to one fret 2 STEP This tuning lowers the strings one whole step All strings are lowered a whole step corre sponding to two frets BARITONE This tuning lowers all strings a perfect fourth five frets making it well suited for heav
41. UNE 133 dae D n 133 UE E 134 134 SLOW GEAR 52 iu cepe ata ce hinten edite ioo 135 dene e oe ora 135 one SU edet oi eant e entem 135 RING MOD Ring Modulator seen enne n nnne nennen 136 ANTLEB Anti feedback 5 5 pesti e a Ute antics antisense 136 ADV COMP Advanced Compressor sse nennen entente 136 LIMITR Limiter e ene nU nia itech Ple A E PRAET 137 SUB EO Sub Equalizer eese tete e RE Reda 137 SUB DELAY Sub Delay rtr nth ese en eei eee n n Le t teg aise 138 COSM AMD eoa PR eb een ete oet etie 140 MIXER E DR nee RD be eem emo eti oae 146 MIXER A B MIXER CHANNEL A 146 PATCH LEVED ennt ger ei ae cete emo t pa eie e tige 146 TOTAL EQ einen en ER Dien eat ode 146 OUTPUT tee E e DR P ONSE iste I e Roe Me efte Ne ete Re 147 DBLEA Yeu n 148 MASTER o nim ditm neo aa tee 150 ete na ede etie ea pec teh Had 150 51 52 DOWN SI UP S2 Switch
42. 100 101 Program Change System Exclusive Common Song Position Song Select Tune Request System Clock Realtime Commands AUX Local ON OFF Messages All Notes OFF All Sound OFF Reset All Controller Active Sense System Reset Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 3 4 M 6 1 O X is selectable 2 Note On is always transmitted with 9nH kkH 3 Can be set with the CHROMATIC parameter Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB Yes x No 180 Chapter 10 Appendices V Guitar System Date May 31 2007 Model VG 99 MIDI Implementation Chart V LINK Section Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 16 x Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 x Default x Messages X Altered eee Note 5 1 Number True Voice 0 127 Velocity Note ON x Note OFF x 2 Key s x Touch Ch s X x Pitch Bend Control Bank Select Change Modulation Balance MSB Pan MSB Expression MSB Hold 1 Portamento Resonance Release Attack Cutoff General Purpose 6 General Purpose 8 Reverb Effects Depth 2 Effects Depth 3 Effects Depth 4 Program Change System Exclusive Common Song Position Song Select Tune Request 1 O X is selectable 2 The Note OFF messages 9nH kkH 00H are always transmitted 3 For correspondences with this device s parameters refer to the V LINK Correspondence Table
43. 116 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting USER TUNING 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 ra TUM IHG 3 Select A or B with F2 A B or the F2 knob You cannot select this when AB LINK is on 4 Switch the function on or off with the F3 knob 5 Use F4 TYPE or the F4 knob to select USER 6 Press F3 USER The USER TUNING screen appears 7 Set the desired key of string with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs 8 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 116 Setting DETUNE 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 ALT TU INT HG CEJ d i 1X d d d omon Omah 12 2TR 12 TR IDETUNEE HARM 3 Switch the function on or off with the F2 or F5 knob 4 If making detailed parameter settings for DETUNE press F2 DETUNE or F5 DETUNE 5 Set the desired parameter with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs 6 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 11
44. 123 148 DELAY 1St 6th ss sik ede m 117 DELAY Ac SEND ress 146 DELAY B SEND cerent 146 DELAY 124 DELAY SW o 123 148 DELAY MME rari te SS 124 138 DELAY TYP E 123 DELAY REVERB 1 cere 35 148 DELAY REVERB 2 12 DELAYT1 FEEDBACK 124 DELAYILEVEL e enacted ctetu 124 DELAY 1 TIME N 124 DELAY2 FEEDBACK erret 124 DEEAYZLEVEL i neuere rb 124 DELAY TIME imet ete eerte s 124 63 EA 148 DENSTY 133 5 peu 126 111 126 129 133 135 DEPT HIS 4 uestre ette 136 DETEGT deh Scheie ahead 138 DETUHNNE enti beer 26 29 116 117 DEMICEID etae teer pese t 170 DIGITAL OUT Connector eee 14 DIRECT S nenne eM 152 DIRECT EDIT i y 82 DIRECT EDIT FI1 F6 ree 156 DIRECT LEVEL 119 121 124 126 130 132 135 136 142 145 DIRECT MON iier 74 173 Direct Monitor eon e ence 74 DIREGTPATGEL eee 86 166 DIRECT PATCH 13 Direction for the Installed Divided Pickup 43 3 b nitate
45. A B The filter is applied to both Channel A and B TYPE This selects the filter type LPF This filter passes only the low frequencies BPF This filter passes frequencies only in the specified range HPF This filter passes only the high frequencies FREQ MIN Frequency Minimum 0 100 This sets the frequency when the filter is first activated Higher frequencies are set as the value is raised FREQ MAX Frequency Maximum 0 100 This sets the frequency when the filter is most fully applied the maximum value Higher frequencies are set as the value is raised RESO Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the amount of filter resonance dis tinctiveness of the sound used Raising the value strengthens the characteristic coloring of the tone 152 MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide RIBBON PITCH Parameter Range Explanation T ARM CH T ARM Channel This selects the channel to which the tremolo T ARM is applied A T ARM is applied only to Channel A B T ARM is applied only to Channel B A B T ARM is applied to both Channel A and B TYPE This selects the T ARM type S TYPE This simulates the Tremolo arm on a Strat type guitar B TYPE This simulates a Bigsby type tremolo arm F TYPE This simulates the characteristics of a Floyd Rose type tremolo arm TRANS This simulates how a Trans tremolo type arm changes the pitch of all
46. Effects 2x2 CHORUS Frequency band division is employed to produce two different choruses one for low frequencies and one for higher frequencies for both the left and right channels for a total of four This allows you to achieve a more natural chorus sound Parameter Explanation Range X OVER FREQ Crossover Frequency 100 Hz 4 00 kHz This sets the frequency dividing the low and high frequency ranges LOW RATE 0 100 Adjust the speed of the chorus effect for the BPM BPM low frequency range When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time controller EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the pitch bend sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 12 LOW DEPTH 0 100 Adjust the depth of the chorus effect for the low frequency range If you wish to use this as a doubling effect use a setting of 0 LOW PREDLY Low Pre Delay 0 0 ms 40 0 ms Adjusts the delay of the effect sound in the low frequency range Extending the pre delay will produce the sensation of multiple sounds doubling ef fect LOW LEVEL 0 100 Adj
47. Explanation GTR MIDI OFF ON This switches the GUITAR TO MIDI func tion on and off Setting this to OFF prevents output of all GUITAR TO MIDI related MIDI messages PATCH These parameters are set for each individual patch with the GUITAR TO MIDI function Parameter Explanation MODE This sets the transmission mode for the MIDI messages MONO In this mode one channel per string is used thus using a total of six channels Since each string uses a different MIDI chan nel you can select a different tone for each string using string bending or continuously varying the pitch on a specific string how ever this requires use of a multitimbral sound module POLY In this mode the messages for all six strings are transmitted over a single channel While transmitting the MIDI messages for all of the strings over one channel does sim plify the settings needed for the sound mod ule and reduces the number of MIDI channels used it does impose certain limita tions for example permitting only one tone to be selected for all of the strings PLAY FEEL namic expression This selects the feeling produced in playing the guitar allowing you to choose picking with fingers or a pick to provide more natural dy FEEL1 4 FEEL1 is the mode that gives sounds the broadest variation in volume based on the picking dynamics As the setting number is in
48. GLOBAL 6 enhn a teen 47 GLOBAL OUTTUT SELECT 1 tt 46 Switch uero t eet teens 14 GEREBOO mee 110 GIR TO MIDE 2 rtt eee tes 164 GUITAR INPUT Jack 14 GUITAR OUTPUT Jack ew 14 ent t e eoe 167 GUITAR TO MIDI eere 64 164 GUITAR TO MIDI Button eee 13 Gu itar s Scale i5 Reit ende es 43 H HARM T rere eet 131 HARMA cede eren 131 HARMO nei eee et 117 HARMONIS tete iie 127 130 Harmonist Scale sese 131 HARMONY 14 00000000000 nennen 26 30 116 Harmony Scale inte nete e Yt 117 HARMONY I aaaea 131 HARMONY mete 131 EHEGAIN 45 eiecit erc rid 140 141 HIGH ifr prey 121 142 144 HIGA GUT 4 t 123 124 126 137 148 126 HIGH DEPTH 2 2 1 000 00000010000 132 HIGH GAIN 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 HIGH ertet D eher 132 HIGH MID FREO 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 HIGH MID GAIN 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 HIGH MID Q 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 HIGH PREDDY matrona iet 132 HIGH RATE doter eee ene 132 EIGEPGUT Ne rede Ss 118 HOLD CMG
49. GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son 7 1 1 Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TE
50. MODE GK S1 S2 only This specifies how the switches function About the Range of Targets Change The target s value changes between MIN the minimum value and MAX the maximum value Combinations of the actions below are possible S1 DEC S2 INC 51 1 52 DEC 51 MIN 52 MAX When a foot switch or other controller that switches settings on 51 MAX S2 MIN and off is used OFF sets the minimum value and ON sets the maximum value INC The value increases Value DEC The value decreases MIN The value is set to the minimum MAX The value is set to the maximum F5 RANGE LOW only when an expression pedal or other controller that changes values in a continuous non discrete way is set as the source This sets the minimum for the range in which the value of the setting can be changed Off On F6 RANGE HIGH only when an expression pedal or other Footswitch controller that changes values in a continuous non discrete way When an expression pedal or other controller that changes is set as the source p values in a consecutive manner is used the value changes This sets the maximum for the range in which the value of the within the range between MIN and MAX setting can be changed Value Degree to Which Expression 0 127 Pedal Is Depressed When the pedal When the pedal is fully raised is fully advanced EXP Pedal When an expression pedal or other controller that changes val
51. Noise Suppressor Switch OFF ON Turns the NS effect on off THRSH Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appro priate Adjust this value until the decay of the guitar sound is as natural as possible VCO The HEXA VCO sound is played V D The HEXA VCO and HEXA DISTORTION sounds are played simultaneously DIST The HEXA DISTORTION sound is played LEVEL 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there will be no sound COMP Compression OFF ON When this is set to ON the HEXA VCO s decay time is extended When ENV MOD SW is set to ON the VCF vari able frequency filter decay time is also extended The HEXA DISTORTION decay time is not REL Release 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time from the point at which application of the noise suppressor begins to when the volume is fully attenuat ed extended CUTOFF FREQ Cutoff Frequency 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The sound gets brighter harder as the value is raised RESO Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique ENV MOD Envelope
52. POLY POLY Mode GTA TO MIDI ELAY CHRO HOLD MODE FEEL MATIC POL FEEL 1 OFF HOLD 1 2 amp 8 In this mode the messages for all six strings are transmitted over a single channel While transmitting the MIDI messages for all of the strings over one channel does simplify the settings needed for the sound module and reduces the number of MIDI channels 67 Chapter 6 Using MIDI Adjusting the Feel Produced in Playing the Guitar PLAY FEEL This selects the response of the synth sound relative to the picking dynamics Changing this setting depending on the performance style used with the guitar or the tone allows you to express dynamics more naturally 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 GTR TO HIDI FLAY CHRO HOLD MODE FEEL MATIC TYPE HOMO FEELi1 FF HOLT Qe 8 3 Adjust the setting with F2 SELECT or the F2 knob e FEELI FEELA FEEL1 is the mode that gives sounds the broadest variation in volume based on the picking dynamics As the setting number is increased it becomes easier to produce high volume sounds even with weaker picking This allows you to play with consistent volume whether you tap the strings or use rough picking NO DYNA In this mode sounds are played at a fixed volume regardless of the picking strength e STRUM This suppresses
53. RIBBON CONTROLLER This allows you to change the tone by sliding your finger along the ribbon p 77 You can switch a variety of effects on and off directly with the three buttons PITCH Button Changes the guitar s pitch FILTER Button Alters the brightness of the sound e ASSIGNABLE Button Use this to assign different parameters and functions to the ribbon controller and change the tone in real time p 82 GK IN Connector Connect the GK cable here POWER Switch Switches the power on and off p 18 p 24 OUTPUT LEVEL Knob This adjusts the volume level for the MAIN OUT jacks and headphone jack 13 Names of Things What They Do Roland VG 99 s Dtm INO PHONES DS EST 3 4 E RRC2 IN LI ou PEDAL for FC 300 1 Security Slot f 10 CTL3 4 CONTROL 3 4 Jack An optional footswitch such as an FS 6 can be connected Connect a commercially available anti theft security cable here p 16 here The patch up down function is assigned to this jack at the factory http www kensington com 11 USB Connector Use a USB cable to connect a computer to this connector and 2 GUITAR INPUT Jack Use this jack when directly inputting a normal guitar enable exchange of data between the VG 99 and the computer 71 3 GUITAR OUTPUT Jack em This outputs sounds from normal guitars connected to a GK 3 12 RRC2 IN Connector and unaltered
54. ced eee reto tienes s 169 SYSTEM uites 42 165 166 SYSTEM ButtOn oxide ec olei ed bons 13 SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN 49 SYSTEM OUTPUT meet 51 127 129 i ten e 140 141 124 TARGET ient 174 TARGET PARAMETER 150 154 156 157 TARM 80 T ARM CH bir 151 153 TE Ge e he ra east ede b vede 103 Tempo So msc Rn S Eee 32 THRSEL s iter 105 108 110 118 120 137 138 TIME erae eb EE 148 156 175 TONE 103 105 107 109 118 120 121 135 136 TOB itu nennt edidi npe enti 121 TOTALE O x ndi ere oed tete des 36 146 TOTAL GAIN 104 108 109 115 123 137 146 177 48 Total REVERB 4 cerent 49 TOUCH SENS rete get 112 114 TOUCH WAH ineo terret 129 ve rere eg 141 143 145 TREBLE FREQ 4 eere eere 143 TREM t ne d i erede DERE 127 TREMOLO eicit eo hint Sos 128 TRIG enn ath deem aee eedem A 133 TRIG SENS been 134 TRIGGR iris tinte ed ce ecu 156 175 Troubleshooting sss 186 TUNER rea etin rr e e erede ts 22 178 TUNER Bu
55. reverb p 35 DYNAMIC Button Used for setting the dynamics p 36 12 Names of Things and What They Do 15 BALANCE Knob Sets the mix balance p 35 CHAIN Button Used to make settings for the effect and COSM guitar COSM amp connection sequence p 34 CONTROL ASSIGN Button This sets the functions assigned to pedals and switches p 82 NAME KEY BPM Button Used to specify patch names and the tempo and key for songs to be played p 32 PATCH LEVEL Knob Adjusts the volume of a patch V LINK Button This switches the V LINK function on and off p 96 DIRECT PATCH Buttons Use these to directly call up the patches you have assigned to them p 86 CONTROL Buttons You can assign and control a variety of different functions with these buttons p 82 EXIT Button Used to return previous screens and to undo operations WRITE Button Use for storing settings in patches and executing operations p 38 p 87 PAGE Buttons This switches the screens displayed in the LCD GUITAR TO MIDI Button This sets the GUITAR TO MIDI function the function that converts what is played on the guitar into MIDI signals p 64 SYSTEM Button Used for making settings related to the VG 99 s operating environment p 42 GLOBAL Button This sets the GLOBAL function which affects the tone of all patches p 46 TUNER Button This turns the tuning function on p 22 30 31 32 33
56. 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound AUTO WAH This changes the filtering over a periodic cycle providing an automatic wah effect Parameter Explanation Selects the wah mode LPF This creates a wah effect over a wide fre Low Pass Filter quency range BPF This creates a wah effect in a narrow fre Band Pass Filter quency range FREQ Frequency 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency of the Wah ef fect PEAK Parameter Explanation Range papane 0 100 Adjusts the amount of wah effect applied in the range near the reference frequency Higher values will produce a stronger tone which emphasizes the wah effect more With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced RATE 0 100 Adjusts the frequency speed of the change BPM o BPM 2 When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound OCTAVE This adds a note one octave lower c
57. 19 Z6 BM 21 emm This setting is not required when piezo pickups are used 9 Press PAGE lt gt go to Page 4 5 x 10 Rotate the F1 F6 knobs to adjust the divided pickup sensitivity for each string First play the sixth string with the maximum force to be used during actual performance and as you play the string set the sensitivity with the F1 knob until the meter registers at a point just before it crosses beyond the maximum level Set the sensitivity for the fifth through first strings in the same manner 21 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds If the level meter registers in excess of the maximum level it means the level is set too high Lower the sensitivity setting Depending on the guitar you are using the level meter may move to the maximum level even when the sensitivity is set to the minimum setting If this occurs adjust the clearance separating the divided pickup and the strings so the distance is slightly greater than specified 11 Check the volume balance of the six strings Play the sixth through first strings with the normal amount of force if any string sounds particularly loud lower the sensitivity setting for that string and keep adjusting until the differences in the strings volume levels are minimal 12 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Making these settings is necessary whenever you install the divided pickup on a new or differen
58. A smaller setting results in a shorter attack 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain MOD TUNE Modulation Tune 0 100 This sets the tuning for the modulation ap plied to the attack MOD DEPTH Modulation Depth 0 100 This sets the depth of the modulation ap plied to the attack Larger values result in deeper undulations ATTACK LEVEL 0 100 This sets the volume level of the attack portion BODY LEVEL 0 100 This sets the volume level for the sustained portion of the sound SUSTAIN 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain 114 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide WAVE Parameter Explanation WAVE SHAPE Selects the wave type on which the synth sound is based SAW Creates a synth sound with a sawtooth waveform SQUARE Creates a synth sound with a square waveform WAVE SENS Wave Sensitivity SYNTH Common Parameters Besides the other COSM SYNTH parameters the VG 99 also includes the following shared parameters Parameter Range Explanation EQ Equalizer A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be fore it is output EQ SW Equalizer
59. ASSIGNABLE setting to ON SW TARGET PARAMETER ALT TUNE A BEND BEND 10 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Although parameter assignments set with Control Assign are saved with the Write procedure the BEND parameter values in Step 8 are not saved cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 116 Setting 12 STRING 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 ALT TU IMS CEI 1X d d d omon Omah 12 2TR 12 TR IDETUNEE HARM 3 Switch the function on or off with the F1 or F4 knob You can make separate 12 STRING settings for COSM GUITAR A and COSM GUITAR 4 If making detailed parameter settings for 12 STRINGS press F1 12STR or F4 12STR 5 Press lt gt to display the parameter you want to set ALT TUM IMG SHIFT zng 4th Eth 12 12 12 12 e ee es ee 6 Set the desired parameter with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs 7 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p
60. BODY TYPE BODY TONE LEVEL AC NYLON BODY ATTACK TONE LEVEL ACSITAR PU SENS BODY COLOR DECAY BUZZ ATTACK LEVEL TONE LEVEL AC BANJO ATTACK RESO TONE LEVEL 157 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A COSM GTR B COSM GTR AC RESO SUSTAIN RESO TONE LEVEL AC VARI BODY TYPE SIZE RESO ATTACK BODY LOW CUT LEVEL PU TYPE PU TONE PU LEVEL BASS BASS TYPE REAR VOL FRONT VOL MASTER VOL TONE SYNTH TYPE SYNTH GR 300 MODE LEVEL COMP CUTOFF FREQ RESO ENV MOD SW SENS ATTACK PITCH A FINE A PITCH SW PITCH B FINE B DUET SWEEP SW SWEEP RISE SWEEP FALL VIBRATO SW VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DEPTH SYNTH BOWED FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS POWER BEND POWER BEND Q SUSTAIN SYNTH DUAL FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS GLIDE SENS GLIDE TIME SUSTAIN 158 MASTER Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A COSM GTR B COSM GTR SYNTH FILTBASS FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS FILTER DECAY C
61. FC AMP CTL1 FC AMP CTL2 V LINK SW D BEAM SELECT PITCH TYPE T ARM SW CONTROL T ARM CH TYPE T ARM S B F DOWN MIN DOWN MAX T ARM TRANS DOWN MIN DOWN MAX FREEZE SW FREEZE CH FREEZE A FREEZE B ATTACK REL LEVEL DIRECT FILTER SW CONTROL FILTER CH TYPE FREQ MIN FREQ MAX RESO LEVEL RIBBON SELECT T ARM SW CONTROL T ARM CH TYPE T ARM S B F DOWN MIN DOWN MAX T ARM TRANS DOWN MIN DOWN MAX FILTER SW CONTROL FILTER CH TYPE FREQ MIN FREQ MAX RESO LEVEL Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 ALT TUNE AB LINK A TUNING TUNING SW B TUNING TYPE A BEND BEND SW B BEND BEND 12STRING SW A 12STRING B 12STRING SHIFT 1st 6th FINE 1st 6th LEVEL 1st 6th DELAY 1st 6th A DETUNE B DETUNE DETUNE SW 1st 6th A HARMONIST B HARMONIST HARMO SW HARMO A COSM GTR B COSM GTR COMMON COSM GTR SW MODELING TYPE E GTR E GTR TYPE PU SEL VOL TONE E GTR VARI STRING VOL CURVE PHASE E GTR REAR PU TYPE POS ANGLE E GTR FRONT PU TYPE POS ANGLE AC TYPE AC STEEL
62. Gibson Les Paul Standard Simulates the installation of two humbucking pickups passive type P 90 The sound of a Gibson Les Paul Junior This provides two single coil pickups of the type used on fixed neck guitars and affectionately known as soap bar or dog ear pickups LIPS Lipstick The sound of a Danelectro 56 U3 This provides two single coil pickups and characterized by an external case reminiscent of a tube of lipstick RICK Rickenbacker The sound of a Rickenbacker 360 Semi hollow body guitar with two unique single coil pickups 335 The sound of a Gibson ES 335 DOT Typical semi acoustic guitar with two humbucking pickups L4 The sound of a Gibson L 4 CES Acoustic body guitar suited for jazz Equipped with two humbucking pickups and strung with flat wound strings VARI Variable Guitar This allows you to design your own guitar you can use up to two pickups of your choice selecting from double coil single coil piezo and acoustic If you use double coil or single coil type pickups you may freely adjust the location of the pickups This lets you make settings for the pickup body and the pitch of each string to specify the sound of the guitar 101 co Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM GUITAR AC Acoustic Guitar p 105 Parameter Explanation STEEL This is the sound of steel strings Steel String Guitar NYLON This is the sound of nylon
63. HORMAL NORMAL 3 Use F6 SELECT or the F6 knob to select the arrangement Settings Explanation NORMAL The switches will not be reversed REVRSE DOWN SI switch and UP S2 switch will be reversed 44 Setting the Gap Between the Pickup and the Bridge PICKUP lt gt BRIDGE Set the clearance from the center of the Divided pickup to the bridge s saddle for each string This setting is not required when piezo pickups are used 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 2 Press PAGE gt to display Page 3 EIER P lt gt zng zd 4th Eth 15 mmm 19 mmm 28 mmm 19 dmm Z6 Gmm zi emm 3 Rotate the F1 F6 knobs to set the clearance for strings 1 6 Settings Explanation Specify the distance between the center 10 0 30 0 mm of the Divided pickup and the center of each bridge saddle 216 1 1010151 lt t t string 6 string 1 String p Bridge Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Adjusting the Sensitivity for Each String Adjust the Divided pickup sensitivity for each string 2 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen Press PAGE to display Page 4 Rotate the F1 F6 knobs to adjust the sensitivity Play each open s
64. JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L George Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Ground Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of May 1 2007 ROLAND 0456
65. Pickup Sound 30 34 MAIC dias 142 144 NORMAL PU 105 108 110 115 UIE es 141 143 145 NOW SHUTDOWN 24 MIDDLE FREQ eet 144 145 INS 105 108 110 138 177 55 170 t d th ect 138 MIDI A CH ettet tentent 176 NUMBER 142 144 MIDEB CH Votes 176 NYLON 106 E BOS v od md 176 170 176 MIDI Device iD 59 OC TAY Eoi eot EA tel ON ase 127 129 NDS esr uu aE On PINT ee OTE OO 170 OCTAVE LEVEL 129 MIDI Omni Mode 222205 59 OD RDS rst nbn Pea oo 120 MD OUT 55d ERI Me dire ete 170 OD DS talos ugs 120 MIDI OUT IN Connector eee 14 OMNI MODE 5 ains tete ete haces tees 170 MIDI PC OUT 60 ORGAN nee et ee 114 oae e 150 154 174 QUT EV 73 173 nce eke 35 OUTPUT 147 172 MIX LEVEL 105 108 110 115 OUTPUT LEVEL Knob eere 13 NICO eise um edu Lit ELS 146 47 35 146 O
66. Setting available with MODE set to AUTO FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide SLOW GEAR This produces volume swell effect violin like sound Parameter Explanation Range SENS Sensitivity 0 100 Adjusts the sensitivity RISE TIME 0 100 Adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum from the moment you begin picking DEFRET This simulates a fretless guitar Parameter Explanation Range TONE 50 50 Adjusts the amount of blurring between the notes SENS Sensitivity 0 100 This controls the input sensitivity of the de fretter ATTACK 0 100 Adjusts the attack of the picking sound DEPTH 0 100 This controls the volume of the harmonics RESO Resonance 0 100 Adds a characteristically resonant quality to the sound EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjust the volume of the defretter sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjust the volume of the direct sound FEEDBACKER This allows you to use feedback playing techniques Note that the notes you want to apply feedback to must be played singly and cleanly You can use the footswitch to switch the effect on and off For more details refer to p 49 Explanation Range MODE OSC Oscillator An artificial feedback sound will be created internally When OSC is selected the effect is activated after a single note is played and the note sta b
67. Settings save screen appears CAIFA COMP jz Bi FX COMP 8i EE HAME WRITE 3 Rotate the F2 SELECT knob to select the write destination At this point you can press F3 SEARCH to display a list of patches using the write destination Favorite Settings For more detailed information refer to Searching for Patches That Use the Same Favorite Settings p 94 SEARCH JING FAVORITE 1 FATCH Li tar 4 Press F6 WRITE to save the settings NOW WRITING is displayed as the Favorite Settings are being saved and the number and name of the currently selected Favorite Settings are displayed 5 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen This procedure only saves information to the Favorite Settings Nothing is saved to the patches To save parameters to patches carry out the Write procedure p 38 93 Chapter 8 Other Functions Naming Favorite Settings FAVORITE NAME When storing Favorite Settings you can also give the settings names Carry out the following procedure in Step 2 of Saving to the Favorite Settings p 93 1 Press F5 The Name edit screen appears FAVORITE NANE ABCDEFGHIJKLMHOPGRSTUWWEYZ THSERTIDELETER SPace fae A 2 Press PAGE lt gt to move the cursor to the position with the character you want to enter 3 Select the character with the PATCH VALUE dial As
68. Switch OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 100 This controls the input sensitivity of the wave synth WAVE ATTACK 0 100 Adjusts the time it takes for the synth sound to rise after a string is plucked When it is set to a lower value the sound will rise quickly When it is set higher the sound will rise slowly WAVE DECAY 0 100 Adjusts the time it takes for the synth sound to decay The synth sound decays more quickly when this parameter is set to a lower value Set ting a higher value increases the decay time WAVE LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the synth sound CUTOFF 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency at which the fil ter cuts off the sound s harmonic compo nents This parameter determines the sound that will result after the filter has stopped vary ing due to FILTER DEPTH 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone RESO Resonance
69. The shift result in longer sustain ing of the filter caused by the picking in creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with no movement BRASS Parameter PWM DEPTH Range Explanation 0 100 This sets the depth to which the waveform s FILTER CUTOFF pulse width is varied Higher values result in deeper undulations 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The PWM RATE sound gets brighter harder as the value is 0 100 This sets the speed at which the filter stops raised The speed increases as the value of the set FILTER RESO Filter Resonance ting is reduced 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the SUSTAIN sound As the value is increased sounds in 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is shifted according to the picking The shift ing of the filter caused by the picking in level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain CRYSTL Parameter creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with ATTACK LENGTH 0 100 This sets the decay time for the attack por SUSTAIN tion of the sound
70. This simulates the sound of a guitar amp s built in spring reverb MOD Modulate This reverb adds the wavering sound found in hall reverb to provide an extremely pleas ant reverb sound REVERB TIME 0 1 s 10 0 s Adjusts the length time of reverberation PRE DELAY 0 ms 100 ms Adjusts the time until the reverb sound ap pears LOW CUT Low Cut Filter FLAT 55 Hz 800 Hz This lets you cut the low end component be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect High Cut High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This allows you to geta mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When FLAT is selected the high cut filter will have no effect DENSTY Density 0 10 Adjusts the density of the reverb sound EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the reverb sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 126 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide MOD1 MOD2 With MOD1 and MOD2 you can select the effect to be used from the following PHASER By adding varied phase portions to the direct sound the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound
71. appro priate Adjust this value until the decay of the guitar sound is as natural as possible High settings for the threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your guitar volume turned down 0 120 Adjusts the volume of delay sound REL Release 138 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time from the point at which application of the noise suppressor begins to when the volume is fully attenuat ed DETECT This controls the noise suppressor based on the volume level for the point specified in Detect INPUT Volume of the COSM guitar and normal pickup NS IN NS Input Noise suppressor input volume FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide FV Foot Volume This is a volume control effect Normally this is controlled with the expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack or the FC 300 s EXP pedal When making the settings determining each pedal s foot volume operations refer to Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 Parameter Explanation LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume VOL CURVE Volume Curve You select how the actual volume changes relative to the amount the pedal is pressed SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL FAST T gt When the pedal When the pedal is fully raised is fully advanced EXP Pedal NOTE Yo
72. available with some JC CLEAN CRUNCH or BASS AMP settings in PREAMP TYPE 143 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM AMP BASS AMP VINTAGE Explanation Parameter Range R This setting selects the simulated mic type GAIN DYN57 This is the sound of the SHURE SM 57 0 100 Adjusts the distortion of the amp General dynamic mic used for instruments BASS and vocals Optimal for use in miking guitar amps 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency DYN421 This is the sound of the SENNHEISER MD 421 MIDDLE Dynamig mic withextended lowend 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency CND451 This is the sound of the AKG C451B range Small condenser mic for use with instru Mn MIDDLE FREQ Middle Frequency CND87 This is the sound of the NEUMANN U87 220Hz 800Hz 3 0kHz Pa control adjusts ES is D ded Condenser mic with flat response js range adjusted with the Mid e control FLAT Simulates a mic with perfectly flat response Produces a sonic image close to that of lis TREBLE tening to the sound directly from the speak 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency ers on site range MIC DIS Mic Distance L
73. be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect HIGH CUT High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When FLAT is selected the high cut filter will have no effect EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound REVERB FX Effects This effect adds reverberation to the sound Parameter Explanation REVERB SW OFF ON Turns the REVERB effect on off TYPE This selects the reverb type Various different simulations of space are offered AMB Ambience Simulates an ambience mic off mic placed at a distance from the sound source used in recording and other applications Rather than emphasizing the reverberation this re verb is used to produce a sense of openness and depth ROOM Simulates the reverberation in small room Provides warm reverberations HALL1 Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides clear and spacious reverberations HALL2 Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides warm reverberations PLATE Simulates plate reverberation a reverb unit that uses the vibration of a metallic plate Provides a metallic sound with a distinct upper range SPRING
74. driver is software that acts as a go between in transferring data between computer applications such as recording software and sequencer software and the USB device when the computer and USB device are connected using a USB cable The USB driver transmits data from the applications to the USB device and conversely passes messages from the USB device to the applications Application USB Driver Computer USB Connector USB Cable 71 Q 17 Chapter 7 Using the VG 99 Connected to Computer Via USB About the Included Software In addition to the USB drivers the included VG 99 Software CD ROM also contains special software that can be used when the VG 99 is connected with a computer The CD ROM contains different versions for use with Windows and Macintosh operating systems VG 99 Editor You can use this to make settings for the VG 99 from your computer You can also save tone setting patch data you have created as files on the computer VG 99 Librarian You can manage the VG 99 s settings and patches all together using your computer Driver Mode The VG 99 features two operational modes one which uses the special driver contained on the included CD ROM and one in which the OS s Windows Mac OS standard driver is used Using the specialized driver you can record play back and edit audio with high quality sound and stable timing I
75. eer 128 FLANG R e e 127 Foot Volume n dedero 139 FORM ne EE e Rt 156 175 EREEZE 4 gura us 79 FREEZE CH bie et emet 152 FREQ eee 129 136 MAX oaeee 152 153 FREQ MIN alaena 152 153 FEREOJ 3r a 136 Fretless Giuit r une niisiis 135 FRON TV QU tene etes 109 FUNCTION Buttons 12 FUNCTION Knob rb teet teme 12 jc 139 IX oe NIE creto stc ENDE See Pei e mu re e 31 120 EX Buttons 3 1 50e p OE EE PU Re pads 12 G GAIN menora evt re Gere Bib tet e DER ER 141 143 145 GATIN SW neenon nnn 141 143 Ca Dein atthe the i ie Anab Ge oda fes 44 GATEGORY NAME sinsir eren 176 GKCOININGT x n sni tes 45 166 GKFUNG genes 46 166 tete tenia 13 GKANAAME eoe e Seng 42 GK PU DIRECTION enne 167 GK PU PHA OP 167 GK PU TYPE innu conde 167 GK 81552 166 166 21 GK VOD etri obe een 150 166 GELEIDE SENS p n eret 112 GEIDE TIME Ene cette roS ntes 112 C OBA I aunuenseee ae h 177 GLOBAL etri et o ene 13 GLOBAL BO 5 nine te mantenida 48
76. gt 1000 2 SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN PATCH LEVEL D GLOBAL NAME 54271 TUNER 1 Press SYSTEM The System screen is displayed DIRECT iin HIDI 2 Press PAGE lt 4 to go to Page 1 3 Press F3 GK The GK Settings screen is displayed SYSTEM E ciama En 4 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 5 Select the divided pickup type Use the F1 knob to set the type of divided pickup installed in the guitar you are using EIER x FU GUITAR TYFE SCALE ak GE FL FHASE DIREC Fos HORMAL HORMAL NORMAL 586 5 5 Settings Explanation GK 3 Specifies the GK 3 GK 2A Specifies the GK 2A PIEZO Specifies a piezo pickup Piezo pickups are a type of pickup that are installed at the guitar s bridge and use piezoelectric elements to determine the string vibrations 6 Set the scale length Use the F3 knob to set the scale length the distance from the bridge to the nut of the guitar you are using Select the closest value within the 620 660 mm range 648 mm is corresponds to the ST setting 628 mm to the LP setting 7 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 3 8 Input the gap between the pickup and the bridge Set the clearance from the center of the divided pickup to the bridge s saddle SYSTEM P lt gt znd 4th Eth 15 mmm 19 mmm 28 mmm
77. i EU land iht til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall oO O0 O 0 O O O O O 0 Symbolen anger att i EU l nder m ste den har produkten kasseras separat fr n hush llsavfall i enlighet med varje regions best mmelser Produkter med den har symbolen far inte kasseras tillsammans med hush llsavfall T m merkint ilmaisee ett tuote on EU maissa ker tt v kotitalousj tteist kunkin alueen voimassa olevien m mukaisesti T ll merkinn ll varustettuja tuotteita ei saa h vitt kotitalousj tteiden mukana Ez a szimb lum azt jelenti hogy az Eur pai Uni ban ezt a term ket a h ztart si hullad kt l elk l n tve az adott r gi ban rv nyes szab lyoz s szerint kell gy jteni Az ezzel a szimb lummal ell tott term keket nem szabad a h ztart si hullad k k z dobni Symbol oznacza e zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie w krajach UE produktu nie nale y wyrzuca z odpadami domowymi Produkt w opatrzonych tym symbolem nie mo na utylizowa razem z odpadami domowymi Tento symbol ud v e v zem ch EU mus b t tento v robek sb r n odd len od dom c ho odpadu jak je ur eno pro ka d region V robky nesouc tento symbol se nesm vyhazovat spolu s dom c m odpadem Tento symbol vyjadruje e v krajin ch E sa mus zb
78. is called a patch Each time you switch a patch you can instantly change to a different tone About the Patch Numbers Patch numbers bank numbers and patch names are indicated in the Play screen as shown below Patch Number GER Patches categorized into User patches and Preset patches User Patches These include 200 preprogrammed patches You can freely change the tones and save the your changes Preset Patches Included here are 200 preprogrammed patches Although you can make changes to these tones you cannot save these changes in a Preset Patch If you want to save a changed tone save it as a User patch 23 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds Switching with the PATCH VALUE Dial You can switch patches consecutively with the PATCH VALUE Dial 1 Confirm that the Play screen is displayed If a screen other than the Play screen is shown press EXIT several times until the Play screen appears 2 Rotate the PATCH VALUE dial to switch the patches POWER PATCH VALUE CATEGORY OUTPUT LEVEL MIN 2 CONTROLLER Exi 103 4 PAGE gt ASSIGNABLE 2 F3 Fa FS Fe GUITAR MIDI T VERS DYNAMIC CHAIN Turn the dial to the right clockwise to switch to the next patch number or to the left counterclockwise to switch to the previous patch number Turning Off the Power 1 Con
79. is excessively low or high due to the influence of the Channel A Alternate Tuning settings the pitch is then automatically set one octave higher or lower Setting the GUITAR TO MIDI Function System Parameters These procedures are used for making settings for the device as a whole Changes are saved at the same time they are changed The Write procedure is not required After entering these parameters press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Switching the GUITAR TO MIDI Function On and Off 1 Press GUITAR TO MIDI The GUITAR TO MIDI screen appears BTE TO HIDI 2 SetGTR TO MIDI to ON with F1 OFF ON or the F1 knob Setting this to OFF prevents the output of all MIDI messages related to the GUITAR TO MIDI function Chapter 6 Using MIDI Selecting the Controller Used to Control the Hold Function HOLD CTL 1 Press GUITAR TO MIDI The GUITAR TO MIDI screen appears BTE TO HIDI 2 Press 5 SYSTEM GTR TO HOLD BEND BASIC Fo CTL MASE Midd ON CTL Bid ON ich 3 ZELECTNOFF OHNRZELECTROFF OH 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select the controller you want to set HOLD CTL Controller GK 51 52 GK 3 DOWN S1 UP S2 switch VG 99 s CONTROL 1 2 buttons or foot switch connected to CTL 3 4 jack FC 300 s CTL 1 2 pedals or foot switch con nected to CTL jacks 3 8 CTL 1 4 FC 300 CTL1 8 Controllers to which
80. left unchanged INVERS The phase is inverted GK PU DIRECTION GK Pickup Direction This sets the direction for the divided pickup s installation NORMAL Positioned such that the cable exits near the 6th string REVRSE Positioned such that the cable exits near the Ist string S1 S2 POS 51 52 Position This exchanges the function for the GK 3 s or GK 2A s DOWN SI UP S2 switches NORMAL The switches are left unchanged REVRSE DOWN SI switch and UP S2 switch are exchanged PICKUP e BRIDGE 1st 6th 10 0 30 0mm This sets the distance of the gap between each Divided pickup and the bridge The setting is disregarded when the GK PU TYPE is set to PIEZO SENS Ist 6th 0 100 This sets the input sensitivity for each string CONTROL ASSIGN Parameter Explanation Range Controller You can freely assign functions to the VG 99 s and FC 300 s control lers GK VOL GK 3 GK volume knob GK 51 52 GK 3 DOWN S1 UP S2 switch Control button1 CTL2 Control button2 EXP PEDAL Expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack CTL3 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 jack jack tip CTLA Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack jack ring FC 300 EXP1 FC 300 expression pedal1 FC 300 EXP SW1 FC 300 expression pedal switch1 FC 300 EXP2 FC 300 expression pedal2 FC 300 EXP SW2 FC 30
81. mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings MIXER DRY This outputs the post A B mix signals be fore application of DELAY REVERB MIXER This outputs the post A B mix signals after application of DELAY and TO TAL EQ SUB LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume the output to the SUB OUT Parameter Range Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Explanation D OUT Digital Output This switches the signals output from the DIGITAL OUT COSM GTR A This outputs the sounds from COSM GTR A COSM GTR B This outputs the sounds from COSM B NORMAL PU This outputs the sounds from the normal pickup CHA This outputs Channel A This output also reflects the mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings CHB This outputs Channel B This output also reflects the mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings MIXER DRY This outputs the post A B mix signals be fore application of DELAY REVERB MIXER This outputs the post A B mix signals after application of DELAY REVERB and TO TAL EQ MAIN OUT This outputs the same signals as those from MAIN OUT SUB OUT This outputs the same signals as those from SUB OUT D OUT LEVEL Digital Output Level 0 200 Adjusts the volume the output to theDIGI TAL OUT The parameters enabled MAIN OUT MAIN LEVEL SUB OUT SUB LEVEL D OUT D OUT LEVEL change according to the settings in OUTPUT MODE p 17
82. ne doivent pas tre mis au rebut avec les ordures m nag res Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunit europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti domestici Ai sensi dell art 13 del D Lgs 25 luglio 2005 n 151 Este s mbolo indica que en los pa ses de la Uni n Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos dom sticos tal como est regulado en cada zona Los productos con este s mbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos dom sticos Este s mbolo indica que nos paises da UE a recolha deste produto dever ser feita separadamente do lixo dom stico de acordo com os regulamentos de cada regi o Os produtos que apresentem este s mbolo n o dever o ser eliminados juntamente com o lixo dom stico Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd Dette symbol angiver at i EU lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald som defineret i hver enkelt region Produkter med dette symbol ma ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet m behandles som spesialavfall
83. on each page The screen shown in the example is for ASSIGN1 Page 1 3 CONTROL H HEZIGHit12 zu TARGET FARAMETER FATCH LEVEL G3 Fe Mid ON OFF OH F1 SOURCE ASSIGNI1 16 only This selects the controller assigned to the function F3 SW ON OFF Setting this to ON enables the controller F4 F6 TARGET PARAMETER Use these to select the parameter you want to assign You can quickly locate and select the desired parameter by first narrowing down the parameter type with F4 then using F5 and then F6 to reach the right parameter Lef gt For more details on the parameters refer to CONTROL ASSIGN p 150 Page 2 4 CONTROL H SOURCE 51 A ASSIGNit 12 zh MODE 168 LATCH CONTROL P GEO Sis Seti HIH FRONT 52 20 9 REAR F2 MIN This sets the minimum value for the target s controllable range F3 MAX This sets the maximum value for the target s controllable range F4 SW MODE only when a switch type controller is selected for SOURCE This specifies how the switches function Available Settings Explanation The parameter switches to the maximum value only while the switch is held down MOMENT and switches to the minimum value when the switch is released The value alternately switches between LATCH maximum and minimum each time the switch is pressed 84 Chapter 8 Other Functions F4
84. op 105 107 BODY LEVEL tette oed 114 BODY TYPE nenne nen 105 107 BOTTOM et pic ecd 121 143 112 BEM hene ete eam esee 163 BRASS 5 5i nae res 114 BRIGEIT er hen 141 143 144 BULKDUMI 3 rename 171 Bulk Dumps oio ete teste tee pe 62 Bulk Load 5 63 BUZZ eee 106 CABINET eti 142 144 CALIBRATION rtt e 76 78 CATEGORY 90 163 CATEGORY Button eren 12 CATEGORY eren 91 p c te 69 165 171 146 CHAIN 32 CHAIN Button eese 13 CHORUS eec de es 126 CHORUS MODE reiten 126 CHORUS SW 7 5 mee SR ER Mee eee 126 CHROMATIC vnia an 164 dette tose eet 103 a arat anam aeter dt 174 COLOR 5e dena bete enm 106 113 22 2 aks 140 141 COMP oea t crede 110 120 terea ctim estet 118 COMJPSW 4 es etre etre oder dd deret 120 COMP TYPE eese 118 COT pressoE pine 120 oai e nir 16 connection point
85. parameter selected as a target in a certain cycle with the assumed expression pedal When you have set WAVE PEDAL for SOURCE the RATE parameter p 156 and FORM parameter p 156 should be set 95 Chapter 8 Other Functions Controlling Video Images with Your Guitar V LINK The VG 99 features the V LINK function With the VG 99 connected to another V LINK compatible device you can use your guitar performance to control playback of video images What is V LINK V LINK is a function that synchronizes the performance of music and video Connecting V LINK compatible devices to each other via MIDI makes it simple to enjoy using a variety of video effects linked with what you express in your performances For example combining the VG 99 with the EDIROL motion dive tokyo performance package lets you do the following Set the required information for motion dive tokyo performance package performances Switch motion dive tokyo performance package video images palettes clips and control the video brightness and hue Enjoy synchronized performances of music and video iUm Be sure also to read the owner s manual for the connected V LINK compatible device Connecting the V LINK Device Connect the VG 99 s MIDI OUT connector to the V LINK compatible device ET When connecting these and other devices turn down the volume completely on all the devices and turn off their power before connecting to
86. pops up in the screen Setting the Volume and Panning for Each Channel 1 Press MIXER 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 Bat LEVEL ima lu s DELAY REVERE _ MIS SM LEVEL Senna SEND DELAY 59 50 Ams 2 099909 OFF Sei Make the settings for each anm page This knob is disabled when the Dynamic function is switched on Page 2 and later pages contain the mixer section s common settings Setting the Delay and Reverb io DELAY REVERB 3 Setthe volume and panning with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs This sets the mixer section s delay and reverb 4 If you want to save the edited settings 1 Press DELAY REVERB perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 2 Press lt to display Page 1 qin DELAY REVERE TELA REVERE When mixing two channels you can produce a more zu LEVEL realistic twin guitar tone by setting a channel delay in ON 3B one of the channels thus causing the two guitar sounds to be output at different times cf gt 3 Switch the delay on or off with F1 OFF ON For detailed information on all the parameters refer to switch the reverb on or off with F4 OFF ON MIXER p 146 4 Set the parameters with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs Each press of PAGE We takes you to the settings screen for the n
87. prevent malfunction and damage to speakers and other equipment lt C MIDI IN MIDI OUT Switching V LINK On and Off 1 Connect the VG 99 s MIDI OUT connector to the V LINK compatible device 2 the power to the device to start it up 3 Press V LINK V LINK is switched on and V LINK lights up The function set in Setting V LINK p 97 is enabled allowing you to control the video images and have them linked with the performance on the VG 99 Even with the V LINK on the still usual function operates Depending on the settings in MIDI ROUTING p 59 signals may not be output from MIDI OUT In such cases V LINK signals are not output either 4 Press V LINK once more The V LINK light goes off and the V LINK function is switched off When the V LINK function is switched off all V LINK related MIDI messages are no longer output Chapter 8 Other Functions Setting V LINK WL INK 15 eth 1 Press SYSTEM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 Press lt gt to go to Page 2 CATEGORY Some V LINK compatible models such as the EDIROL ae ISC DV 7PR allow only Channel A to be used CATORVA CAL IE Note messages output with the V LINK function are 3 Press F3 V LINK affected by the parameters set in Playing an External Synthesizer Sound Module GUITAR TO MIDI p
88. response when the input level drops 1 Setting available when TYPE is set to DYNA or DYNA B 2 Setting available when TYPE is set to DYNA BAL lt TR With DYNAMIC when a new note is detected the peak level at the instant the string is picked i e the picking dynamics is held momentarily and control of the channel volume or balance is based on that value The picking dynamics controls the sound as described below When the level is at or below the LOWER RNG setting the picking controls the volume or balance of the softer sounds set in LOWER LEV when TYPE is set to DYNA A or DYNA B or LOWER BAL when TYPE is set to DYNA BAL When the level is at or above the UPPER RNG setting the picking controls the volume or balance of the louder sounds set in UPPER LEV when TYPE is set to DYNA A or DYNA B or UPPER BAL when TYPE is set to DYNA BAL When the level is between these settings the picking controls the volume or balance between the softer sounds and louder sounds described above continuously changing the level according to the dynamics Changes made to the above parameters are indicated in the graph in the settings screen When TYPE is set to DYNA A or DYNA B LOWER LEV UPPER LEV LOWER LEV 3 COMER gir Volume Balance UPPER RNG Control Status j RELERSE RNG UPPER RNG Input Level Held Peak Input Level When TYPE is set to DYNA BAL LOWER BAL UPPER BAL LOWER BAL 15 65 3 LOWE
89. separated STACK AMP se this setting when connecting to the RE URN of a JC 120 JC 120 Return Use this setting when connecting to the RE T U COMBO URN of a combo amp se this setting when connecting to the RE TURN of a stack amp or the input of a rack mounted power amp Set to STACK Return also when using a guitar power amp and speaker cabinet combination STACK Return Use this setting when using headphones or when connecting to a multi track recorder for recording LINE PHONES 4 Press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds inputting the Divided Pickup Settings GK Settings The 99 sound characteristics vary greatly depending on how the divided pickup is installed To ensure consistent conditions for optimal sound production be sure to make the settings affecting the divided pickup the GK settings With these settings appropriately made the VG 99 can then operate under optimal conditions For information parameters not described in this chapter refer to GK SETTING p 166 When using more than one guitar with the VG 99 you can save the settings for each guitar separately NOTE The GK settings are extremely important to getting good tones from the VG 99 Be sure to input the settings correctly RIBBON CONTR 4 ext GN siren QQ F2 F3 Fa F5 Fe 4 PAGE
90. set to FIX Patch Bank Select Program Number Number 001 0 1 100 0 100 101 1 1 200 1 100 201 2 1 400 3 100 Chapter 6 Using Setting the TX To set Program Change messages to be transmitted with individual patches make the settings described below Patch parameters are settings made individually for each patch The Write procedure is required to save changes in the settings 1 Select the patch to which you want to assign the predetermined Program Change message to be transmitted 2 Press NAME KEY BPN 3 Press F5 TX PC KE EPH RE BEANE LZE DFF lt 1 gt 4 Use F1 F3 or F1 F3 knob to set the Program Change Number and the Bank Select 5 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen RX PC MAP RECEIVE PROGRAM CHANGE MAP You can select whether to use a fixed or freely set correspondence between program numbers received and the patches switched to when the VG 99 s patches are switched by Program Change messages transmitted by an external MIDI device 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt gt to display Page 5 SYSTEM RX PC OUT Ec FIK
91. settings 1 and 2 SRC Source GK VOL GK 3 GK volume knob 51 GK 3 DOWN S1 switch 52 GK 3 UP S2 switch Control button1 CTL2 Control button2 EXP PEDAL Expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack CTL3 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 jack jack tip CTL4 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack jack ring D BEAM V D BEAM vertical movements D BEAM H D BEAM horizontal movements RIBBON ACT RIBBON CONTROLLER touch RIBBON POS RIBBON CONTROLLER position FC 300 EXP1 FC 300 expression pedal1 FC 300 EXPSW1 FC 300 expression pedal switch1 FC 300 EXP2 FC 300 expression pedal2 FC 300 EXPSW2 FC 300 expression pedal switch2 300 FC 300 control pedal1 FC 300 CTL2 FC 300 control pedal2 FC 300 E3 C3 FC 300 external expression pedal3 external footswitch3 FC 300 CTL4 FC 300 external footswitch4 FC 300 E4 C5 FC 300 external expression pedal4 external footswitch5 FC 300 CTL6 FC 300 external footswitch6 FC 300 E5 C7 FC 300 external expression pedal5 external footswitch7 FC 300 CTL8 FC 300 external footswitch8 CC Control Change OFF 1 31 64 95 This sets the Control Change number to be output When the MONO POLY setting is set to POLY messages are output only over the basic channel when this is set to MONO the messages are output over the six channels starting from the
92. signals from the GUITAR INPUT jack Accepts connection of an FC 300 optional This connector supplies power to the FC 300 and provides for 4 SUB OUT Connectors L R These balanced output jacks use XLR type connectors The SUB OUT Land R connectors are unaffected by the OUTPUT LEVEL knob settings output is constant at a fixed output level 4 dBu 13 MIDI OUT IN Connector Connect an external MIDI device here to transmit and receive two way communications with it p 52 The RRC2 IN connector is for use exclusively with the FC 300 It cannot be used with other devices 5 GND LIFT Switch You can disconnect the SUB OUT connectors No 1 pin from the VG 99 s ground 14 DC IN AC Adaptor Jack Switch this to LIFT if a ground loop or similar problem is Connect the included AC adaptor here MIDI messages to and from the device p 58 causing output of hum or noise Normally this is set to GND To prevent damaging the VG 99 please be sure not to use any AC adaptor other than the one included with the VG 99 6 MAIN OUT Jacks L MONO R These are unbalanced phone jack outputs Use these to 15 Cord Hook connect to amps mixers and similar equipment Fasten the AC adaptor cord using this hook to prevent the cord from being disconnected accidentally p 17 7 PHONES Jack Disconnecting the AC adaptor while the VG 99 is use may result Connect headphones here in corruption of important data 8 DIG
93. simultaneous control W v A amp B of the mixer volume level in Channel A and Channel B MIXER LEVEL Provides control of the mixer W v A volume level in Channel A or MIXER LEVEL Channel B vi v B PATCH SEL When set to INC patch num v DEC INC bers increase when patches are switched setting this to DEC causes the VG 99 to switch to lower patch numbers when patches are switched TUNER ON OFF Switches the TUNER screen BPM TAP Allow tap input for the BPM parameter PATCH LEVEL Increases the patch level INC 168 SYSTEM Chapter 9 Parameter Guide CTL1 4 FC 300 EXP SW1 EXP SW2 FC 300 CTLI 2 4 6 8 FC 300 EXP3 CTL3 EXP4 CTL5 EXP5 CTL7 GK 51 52 GK VOL EXP PEDAL 300 EXP1 EXP2 Parameter Explanation PATCH LEVEL Decreases the patch level DEC AB BALANCE Increases the volume level in toB Channel B in the balance be tween Channel A and Channel B AB BALANCE Increases the volume level in toA Channel A in the balance be tween Channel A and Channel B FC 300 Switches to the channel as AMP CTL 1 signed for the guitar amp con nected the FC 300 s AMP CONTROL jack FC 300 Switches to the channel as AMP CTL 2 signed for the guitar amp con nected the FC 300 s AMP CONTROL jack FC 300 Parameter SYS MODE System Exclusive Mode This sets the FC 300 s con
94. switches to the patches predeter mined for the corresponding received Pro gram Change messages regardless of the Receive Program Change Map settings PROG The VG 99 s switches to the patches set in the Receive Program Change Map RX PC MAP RX Program Change Map You can edit the correspondence between the Program Change num bers received and the patches that are switched to F1 BANK Selects the Bank number F2 F3 SEL Selects the Program number F2 F3 knob F5 SELECT Selects the patch F5 knob When the combination of the Bank number and Program number selected with F1 F2 and F3 is received the VG 99 switches to the patch selected with F5 CC Control Change als are operated This sets the Control Change numbers output when the VG 99 s pedals and external pedals or the FC 300 s pedals and external ped F2 F3 SEL Selects the controller F2 F3 knob F5 SET OFF When the controller selected with F2 or F3 is F5 knob operated the Control Change message se lected with F5 is transmitted Parameter Explanation BULK DUMP With the VG 99 you can use Exclusive messages to set another VG 99 to the same settings or to save effect sound settings to MIDI se quencers and other such devices ALL All transmittable data SYSTEM GK SET TING GLOBAL PATCH 001 200 FAVOR ITE SETTING SYSTEM SYSTEM par
95. te a e 77 Divided Pickup Settings sss 42 Divided Pickup Type see 43 DOWNI nete bee i ene 151 153 idees 151 153 DOWN S1 52 Switch Arrangement 44 DRIVES 118 121 DRIVEBAL aeuo trn tte ee ett ee 118 DRIVER eee eee 173 Driver 72 DUAL e teniente enel en idee 112 DU ATs ecient Sia tee oen 124 DUALSP cen n E 124 Gaede 124 DUET pone metae 111 esie e teet 174 ID VINA SW ORE ER RERO NES 149 DYNAMIC roit ein e i peeing 36 149 DYNAMIC Button 12 B GER 101 Ee GTRINPE 101 E GTR tente vete etn rdg 103 EDGE mre sony n dm 143 EFFECT LEVEL 121 124 126 128 132 135 136 138 25 31 120 Electric Guitar e tete tee eee 103 5t us SE ens 145 ENV MOD scere tpi mo acne nt 110 104 108 109 115 123 toe tenerte e aed 177 E 177 BO SW 104 108 109 115 123 146 2
96. ten separate Global function settings 1 10 After you have finished inputting the various settings press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 The Global screen appears GLOEAL SETTING 1 GLOBAL A SELECT 3 Select any setting 1 10 with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob The following parameter settings are stored to their corresponding areas in memory Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Naming the Settings GLOBAL Setting the Types of Connected NAME Devices OUTPUT SELECT You can assign up to ten user names each containing up to eight You can match the VG 99 s output response to that of the connected characters For example you could create names that suggest the device Making this setting helps keep differences in sound qualities gear used in a certain setting or a place where you perform respective to the connected device to a minimum 1 Press GLOBAL 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 GLOBAL GLOBAL SETTING SETTING 1 GLOBAL A 1 GLOBAL A SELECT J NAME Lus SELECT MAME FE 3 Use F4 OUTPUT SELECT or the F4 knob to set the type of device to be connected to the MAIN OUT jacks RBCDEF HIJKLMNOPBRSTUUWKVZ Use this setting when connecting to Ro fo 3 A EET 5 m xm
97. the F1 F6 knob to set the amount of pitch shift for each voice Tf due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time LEVEL1 LEVEL2 1 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the harmony sound VOICE1 INTERVAL C B VOICE2 INTERVAL 2 24 24 Sets the output pitch for the set key relative to the input pitch 1 and HARM 2 are set individually 2 VOICE1 INTERVAL VOICE2 INTERVAL is enabled when HARM 1 2 is set to USER Q gt o a Explanation Creating Harmonist Scales HARMONY1 HARMONY2 1 User Scale 131 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide PEDAL BEND This lets you use the pedal to get a pitch bend effect Because of the need to analyze the pitch chords two or more sounds played simultaneously cannot be played Chapter 5 Using the VG 99 Combination with FC 300 p 52 Parameter Range Explanation PITCH MIN Pitch Minimum 24 24 This sets the pitch at the point where the ex pression pedal is fully lifted PITCH MAX Pitch Maximum 24 24 This sets the pitch at the point where the ex pression pedal is all the way down PEDAL POS Pedal Position 0 100 Adjusts the pedal position for pedal bend This parameter is used after it s been assigned to an expression pedal or similar FX
98. the GK SETTING screen 4 Press PAGE to display Page 1 SYSTEM SETTING 1 GK SET 3 T 5 Press F4 SELECT or turn the F4 knob to select the GK setting 1 10 This specifies the setting to be stored as the GK setting Pressing EXIT at this point and returning to the Play screen enables the selected GK setting When PATCH is selected for the SETTING MODE parameter the GK settings specified in each patch take priority For detailed information refer to Using Different Guitar Settings in Each Patch SET MODE p 46 The following section describes parameters related to the GK settings After you have finished inputting the various settings press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen Naming GK Settings GK NAME You can give names to each of the GK settings 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 SYSTEM RBCDEFSHIJKLMHOPBRSTUUMXVZ EZH 4 Setthe name using PAGE 4 gt F1 F5 and the PATCH VALUE dial Function Button Explanation F1 INSERT Insert a space at the cursor location Delete a character The characters that follow get shifted to the left Input a space at the cursor location F2 DELETE F3 SPACE Switch between uppercase letters and
99. the VG 99 to its Original Factory Condition FACTORY 100 Chapter 9 Parameters 101 COSM e aae al obo eei a et bas 101 Modeling Dist x oct eee eo ege nm ege eee edens 101 ALTERNA TE TUNN Ur e ee b bial ip one be ted 116 POLY EX Poly Effect eerte eil red tp iere ate Regen a indore et me e ete n ptite 118 da alias ta PEPPER PU e ape prO 120 Using the HOLD Hold Delay ettet tetendit retinentes 125 PETA SERS nett e RETREAT RR ERRARE HERI TS 127 FLANGER ehh Cm dehet ee dede nid en m Cope sped Ad e e hne 128 TREMLE CLIremol o Bebe nen 128 PAIN DT E MM scs de et a DE 128 T WAH 129 AUTO eco nette ge UU i Gto e eng eee n e eae 129 aote pn DR e n e Ote ten en OR 129 PITCELSEIET Pitch Shifter tero e ere eee re e Rae este titu 130 5 EET IE ARIES 130 Creating Harmonist Scales User Scale sse eene 131 es RR EO aedi 132 200 CHORUS ene eee ne obe led et e e ee ere tisk 132 neg RR HER BUR I i CRT REUS 133
100. the decay of the guitar sound is as natural as possible REL Release 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time from the point at which application of the noise suppressor begins to when the volume is fully attenuat ed AC Acoustic Guitar Setting the parameter of acoustic guitar STEEL Parameter Explanation BODY TYPE Selects the type of resonating body MA28 The sound of a Martin D 28 Older model known for its exquisitely bal anced sound TRP 0 The sound of a Martin 000 28 This model features a full low end reso nance and crisp distinct contour GB45 The sound of a Gibson J 45 This vintage model features a unique sea soned tone with good response GB SML The sound of a Gibson B 25 Featuring a compact body this vintage model is often used in blues GLD 40 The sound of a GUILD D 40 This model features warm resonance from the body along with a delicate string resonance BODY 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation Raising the val ue produces more of a sense of the guitar body in the sound Lower the value in condi tions where feedback is prone to occur TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone of the body standard value is 0 raising the value boosts the high range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the body With a set ting of 0 there will be no sound 105 gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guid
101. the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 40 Customizing the Overdrive Distortion l Press FX The FX Edit screen appears 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 230 Tall On CUSTOM Distortion 4 Select CUSTOM as the OD DS TYPE with F2 SELECT or the F2 knob 5 Press PAGE gt display Page 2 6 Select the basic type with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob 7 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F5 or with the F1 F5 knobs If there are other parameters you want to adjust press PAGE gt 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 needed cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to OD DS Overdrive Distortion p 120 9 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 3 Creating Your Own Effect Types CUSTOMIZE Customizing Pedal Wah 1 Press FX The FX Edit screen appears 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 COMP 00 05 EL DL CHO b WAH 5 TYPE 28 LELEL GON CUSTOM 188 108 Ham E E 4 Select CUSTOM as the WAH TYPE with F2 SELECT or the F2 knob 5 Press PAGE gt display Page 2 CUS TOM RANGE FRES HIGH
102. the sound s frequency ranges giving the sound a unique tone You can add different types of expression to the sound by changing the frequencies pitches that are passed Parameter Range Explanation FILTER CH Filter Channel Parameter Explanation Range pans LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume level Raising the value increases the volume ASSIGNABLE Parameter Explanation SW Switch OFF ON This setting switches D BEAM ASSIGN ABLE on and off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH Low 0 126 High 1 127 You can set the range for control of target parameters within the D BEAM controller s response range Target parameters are controlled within the range set with RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH You should normally set RANGE LOW to 0 and This selects the channel to which the filter is applied RANGE HIGH to 127 A The filter is applied only to Channel A B The filter is applied only to Channel B
103. the strings equally DOWN MIN Down Minimum 50 50 This sets the pitch when the RIBBON CON S TYPE B TYPE F TROLLER is pressed at the end closest to the TYPE front Setting a negative value raises the 24 424 pitch while setting a positive value lowers TRANS the pitch DOWN MAX Down Maximum 50 50 This sets the pitch when the RIBBON CON S TYPE B TYPE F TROLLER is pressed at the end farthest TYPE from the front Setting a negative value rais Parameter Explanation Range FREQ Frequency Maximum 0 100 This sets the frequency when the RIBBON CONTROLLER is touched at the end away from the front the maximum value Rais ing the value increases the set frequency RESO Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the amount of filter resonance dis tinctiveness of the sound used Raising the value strengthens the characteristic coloring of the tone LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume level Raising the value increases the volume ASSIGNABLE Parameter Explanation Range SW Switch OFF ON This setting switches RIBBON ASSIGN ABLE on and off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Max
104. to 0 makes the changes easier to confirm This SWEEP function smoothly changes the amount of pitch shift when the amount of pitch shift is changed with PITCH SW SW Switch ATTACK 0 100 Adjusts the attack time for the change in the en velope modulation produced by picking Rais ing the value slows the attack for this change PITCH A PITCH A FINE PITCH B PITCH B FINE These adjust the amount of pitch shift This is enabled when the PITCH SW parameter is set to anything other than OFF The final amount of shift in the pitch is the sum of the pitch shift set with PITCH and PITCH FINE OFF ON Turns the SWEEP function on off PITCH SW is normally controlled after the settings for the operation of PITCH SW are made in Control Assign The SWEEP function is enabled when the amount of shift in the pitch of the HEXA VCO is changed through the operation of PITCH SW It is not activated in response to changes in the pitch of the input when the amount of pitch shift does not change No effect is produced when the SWEEP SW in RISE and FALL is set to OFF RISE 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time for the pitch to shift when the PITCH SW parameter is switched and the sound changes to a higher pitch When set to zero the pitch changes instant ly at higher values the pitch rises more slowly FALL PITCH A This sets the amount of shift in pitch from PITCH B the orig
105. to Fast When the Rate Slow or Rate Fast set to BPM the value of each pa rameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 speci fied for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time RISE TIME 0 100 This parameter adjusts the time it takes for the rotation speed to change when switched from Slow to Fast FALL TIME 0 100 This parameter adjusts the time it takes for the rotation speed to change when switched from Fast to Slow DEPTH 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of depth in the rotary effect UNI V This models the sound of the Uni vibe Although the same type of effect as a phaser its characteristic feature is a unique twisting effect which you can t get from an ordinary phaser Parameter Explanation Range RATE 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the Uni V effect BPM BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time
106. to become pinched when attaching and removing the units 99 Chapter 8 Other Functions Restoring the VG 99 to its Original Factory Condition FACTORY RESET 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE gt to display Page 3 3 Press F1 F RST SYSTEM FACTORY 7 o EVETEM SETTING v aLOERL VM FHTCH from Gai to CHECK 4 Select the parameters you want to restore to the original factory condition Available Settings Explanation ALL All data System Parameter Harmonist Scale Auto SYSTEM Riff Phrase Pre Amp Speaker Overdrive Distortion Wah GK SETTING Content of GK settings GLOBAL Content of settings for GLOBAL function PATCH Content of settings for PATCH 001 200 FAVORITE Content of settings for FAVORITE SET SETTING TINGS 01 10 for all effects 5 Press F6 EXEC 6 execute Factory Reset press WRITE cancel Factory Reset press EXIT MES gt AGE FACTORY RESET CHE ora When Factory Reset is completed the Play screen returns to the display 100 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide In this chapter you will find detailed descriptions for each of the VG 99 s parameters used to control them The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners which are separate companies from Roland Those companies are not affiliated with Roland and have not licensed or authorize
107. which signals are sent to the computer with USB OUT p 73 For example by selecting COSM GTR A or COSM GTR B you can listen to the performance with the effects applied while recording it In the computer application set the audio output port to the VG 99 You can use the VG 99 to apply effects to the audio data played by the computer then record the data again with the computer Use this process when for example you want to add effects to without the effects 5 existing audio data If passing audio data through the software you re using switch the fp 8 8 f amp Set the software so audio is not passed through it direct monitor off 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press lt gt to go to Page 2 SYSTEM CATEGORY NAME MISC VLIE CP AECOER OUTPUT W LINK PCATGRY MIs 3 Press F2 USB 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 5 Use F1 or the F1 knob to set the point within the VG at which you want the connection to be 2 made Here set either COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU cf gt For more information about the USB IN parameter settings refer to Setting the Digital Audio Signal Input and Output p 73 6 Use F2 or the F2 knob to adjust the level of the digital audio from the USB computer 7 Press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen 75 Chapter 8 Other Functions Changing the Tone i
108. with F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs 7 Adjust the parameters until you achieve the sound you want Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to COSM p 140 8 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not need to save the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting the Effects POLY FX Poly Effect You can use POLY FX in only one channel at a time A or B 1 Press POLY FX for the channel either A or B in which you want to use it 2 Press PAGE lt several times to display Page 1 POLY T POLNE BON DIST 3 Switch the function on or off with the F1 ON OFF or the F1 knob MODELING SU THEE Fx A E 4 Select the POLYFX TYPE with F2 SELECT or the F2 knob 5 Using A B or the knob switch the channel to the one in which POLY FX is to be used 6 Press PAGE T HODE nRIUE PEIVE LEVEL CLR oD FLAT 5 09 9 9 0 Each press of PAGE We takes you to the settings screen for the next parameter 7 Setthe desired parameter with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs 8 Adjust the parameters until you achieve the desired sound Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to POLY FX Po
109. you continue to rotate the PATCH VALUE dial the character guide automatically switches from uppercase letters to lowercase letters numerals and symbols You can carry out the following operations by pressing F1 F5 Buttons Functions F1 INSERT Inserts a blank space at the cursor position F2 DELETE Deletes the character and shifts the follow ing characters to the left F3 SPACE F4 A0 Enters a blank space at the cursor position Switches between letters numerals and symbols Switches between uppercase and lowercase letters F5 lt gt 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to complete the Favorite Setting name 5 When you have finished editing the name press EXIT The Favorite Settings save screen returns to the display 6 Press F6 WRITE the settings are saved 7 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play Screen Searching for Patches That Use the Same Favorite Settings Here is an example using the compressor effect 1 Press FX 2 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 EB pL A DT O OMAH ODDS EG DELAY CHORUS 3 Press F1 COMP The number and name of the currently selected Favorite Settings are displayed Maa OW Uu 1 FX CDMP 01 If not using the Favorite Settings proceed to Step 4 EDIT 4 Press F6 EDIT 5 Press PAGE gt to display the last page in this ca
110. 0 Setting thie Effects o et eee I rre HIR I HR Renee ser te La 31 POLY EX Poly EITGOE aeria Li ENGEL etn he opm vade Me 31 eni enti den t ede ete ee eue deret 31 Rearranging the Effect and Amp Connection Sequence CHAIN sss 32 Specifying the tempo and key of the song to be played sssssssssssssesseeeeeee 32 Setting the Tenpin eite iles e ret dated aede afa ed eta ens 32 Setting the Keys es sce UR RR e ER ERE pa te a EE 33 Mixing the Normal Pickup Sound nenne 33 Setting the Volume tenente nete nne 33 Setting the Point at Which the COSM Guitar is Connected sss 34 Mixing Two Tones MIXER teret tette bt edere e iter tede 35 Setting the Volume and Panning for Each Channel sss 35 Setting Balance sicrie 35 Setting the Delay and Reverb DELAY REVERB cccccesessssesssseseseseenenesesesnsneneseseseeeseseeans 35 Using Picking Dynamics to Control the Mix Between the Two Channels DYNAMIC 36 Setting the Overall Patch Volume Level PATCH LEVEL n 36 Adjusting the Overall Patch Tone TOTAL EQ 36 Setting the Output Signal and Level OUTPUT 37 Naming a Patch PATCH NAME irte ient em rte pae
111. 0 expression pedal switch2 300 CTL1 FC 300 control pedal1 FC 300 CTL2 FC 300 control pedal2 FC 300 E3 C3 FC 300 external expression pedal3 external footswitch3 FC 300 CTL4 FC 300 external footswitch4 FC 300 E4 C5 FC 300 external expression pedal4 external footswitch5 FC 300 CTL6 FC 300 external footswitch6 FC 300 E5 C7 FC 300 external expression pedal5 external footswitch7 FC 300 CTL8 FC 300 external footswitch8 ASSIGN HOLD This setting determines whether or not the values positions of the D BEAM or RIBBON CONTROLLER or the FC 300 s expression pedals or control pedals or other controllers are to be reflected in the sound as soon as a patch is called up ON When patch is called up the controller val ues positions are applied producing a sound that reflects the controller settings OFF When a patch is changed the sound set in the patch is played regardless of the controller values positions 16 Q 4 17 o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Separate Controllers CTL1 4 FC 300 EXP SW1 EXP SW2 FC 300 2 4 6 8 FC 300 EXP3 CTL3 EXP4 CTL5 EXP5 CTL7 CTL1 4 FC 300 EXP SW1 EXP SW2 FC 300 CTLI 2 4 6 8 GK 51 2 GK VOL EXP PEDAL FC 300 EXP1 EXP2 Parameter Explanation PU SEL A amp B Allows you to switch the pick ups in
112. 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is shifted according to the picking The shift ing of the filter caused by the picking in creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with no movement FILTER DECAY 0 100 This sets the speed at which the filter stops The speed increases as the value of the set ting is reduced The decay effect cannot be obtained if the TOUCH SENS value is too low COLOR 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the low range As the value is increased the low range will be come stronger Chapter 9 Parameters Guide SOLO Parameter Explanation Range FILTER CUTOFF 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The sound gets brighter harder as the value is raised FILTER RESO Filter Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is shifted according to the picking The shift ing of the filter caused by the picking in creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with no movement COLOR 0 100 Adjusts the amount of harmonics in the sound when the guitar strings ar
113. 2 in the SYSTEM screen When disabled the value lt gt is given 14 gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MIXER DELAY REVERB You can apply delay and reverb jointly to Channel A and Channel B DELAY REVERB Signal Flow LEVEL DELAY LEVEL REVERB LEVEL REVERB Toe FLAT Parameter E Explanation REVERB SW OFF ON Turns the REVERB effect on off TYPE This selects the reverb type Various different simulations of space are offered AMB AMBIENCE Simulates an ambience mic off mic placed at a distance from the sound source used in recording and other applications Rather than emphasizing the reverberation this re verb is used to produce a sense of openness and depth ROOM Simulates the reverberation in a small room Provides warm reverberations HALL1 Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall Provides clear and spacious reverberations HALL2 Simulates the reverberation ina concert hall Provides warm reverberations PLATE Simulates plate reverberation a reverb unit that uses the vibration of a metallic plate Provides a metallic sound with a distinct upper range TIME 0 1 s 10 0 s Adjusts the length time of reverberation PRE DELAY 0 ms 100 ms Adjusts the time until the reverb sound ap pears LOW CUT Low Cut Filter Parameter Explanation Range DELAY SW OFF
114. 22 150 152 154 156 A lp rem 111 RATE 111 126 129 133 134 156 175 v RATE FAST acriter epis ia 133 do cet 111 RATE SLOW sse 133 FINE ORC LS PR MERI es 1 1 1 RATIO 137 s REAR VOL MH 109 PITCH MIN COTIERE E EE EE 132 Reference Pitch PEREA E E EE T EEE A A A TAA 22 PITCH SHIFT 127 130 REL 105 108 110 118 120 137 138 152 PITCH SHIRT eost ens o ette ronds 130 Related to the FC 300 00 9 52 SHIFT2 OVE REPETI ES 130 RELEASE 149 PITCH SW 111 RESO 106 107 110 115 127 128 135 152 153 151 RESPONSE 144 130 REVERB eene 126 148 177 PLAY were temor chic aote 164 REVERB A SEND 146 Play
115. 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 411 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama Cideng Timur No 15 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 VIET NAM Suoi Nhac Company Ltd 370 Cach Mang Thang Tam St Dist 3 Ho Chi Minh City VIET NAM TEL 9316540 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Soi Verng NakornKasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 A
116. 2dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone MIXER OUTPUT This setting determines which signals are output at each output and the level at which they are output Parameter Explanation MAIN OUT This switches the signals output from the MAIN OUT CHA This outputs Channel A This output also reflects the mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings CHB This outputs Channel B This output also reflects the mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings MIXER DRY This outputs the post A B mix signals be fore application of DELAY REVERB MIXER This outputs the post A B mix signals after application of DELAY and TO TAL EQ MAIN LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume the output to the MAIN OUT SUB OUT This switches the signals output from the SUB OUT CHA This outputs Channel A This output also reflects the mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings CHB This outputs Channel B This output also reflects the
117. 300 s CTL2 FC 300 s External Expression Pedal 3 External Footswitch 3 FC 300 s External Footswitch 4 FC 300 s External Expression Pedal 4 External Footswitch 5 FC 300 s External Footswitch 6 FC 300 s External Expression Pedal 5 External Footswitch 7 FC 300 s External Footswitch 8 FC 300 E3 C3 FC 300 CTL4 FC 300 E4 C5 FC 300 CTL6 FC 300 E5 C7 FC 300 CTL8 4 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob or F5 SELECT or the F5 knob to select the Control Change number you want to output Off CC 41 431 CC 464495 69 Chapter 6 Using MIDI The MIDI channel over which the messages are output in POLY mode is only the basic channel In MONO mode the messages are output over the six channels spanning from the basic channel up to the channel numbered five above the basic channel Outputting Program Change Messages Simultaneously When Switching Patches PC This sets the Program Change messages that are output when the VG 99 s patches are switched Program Change messages are not output while PC MASK p 66 is set to ON 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Pages 3 5 GTR To MID FCHICH i STRING EANKE BANK LSE LEE OFF OFF OFF OFF When MODE p 2 is set to MONO you can make settings indiv
118. 4 PL 03 664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 4419 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SLOVAKIA DAN Acoustic s r o Povazska 18 SK 940 01 Nov Z mky TEL 035 6424 330 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE EURHYTHMICS Ltd P O Box 37 a Nedecey Str 30 UA 89600 Mukachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 1231 amp 1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931 Manama 339 BAHRAIN TEL 17 813 942 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha alia Hashnia St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192
119. 6 29 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting HARMONY 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 ALT TU EHI CEJ d i X d TE 4 omon Omah IDETUHER 12 TR IDETUNEE HARM 3 Switch the function on or off with the F3 or F6 knob 4 If making detailed parameter settings for HARMONY press F3 HARMO or F6 HARMO 5 Set the desired parameter with F1 SELECT F2 SELECT or with the F1 F2 knobs You can set the pitch for each key when the HARMO parameter is set to USER Press PAGE lt 4 to display the parameter you want to set 6 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 116 30 Setting the COSM AMP Tone 1 Press COSM AMP 2 Press PAGE lt several times to display Page 1 3 Use F1 ON OFF or the F1 knob to switch the COSM AMP ON OFF setting COSH FREAMF AMF zu COMBO FAT 4 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob to select the COSM AMP type 5 Press PAGE fa COSH BASS MIDDLE TREBLE AES LEVEL sa 9 44 5a ga Each press of PAGE We takes you to the next screen in which parameter settings are made 6 Adjust the desired parameter
120. 6 Alternate Tuning Het eim peers 26 ALTERNATE TUNING Button 12 AMP CONTROL ener 163 GTI nonam 163 AMP CTL2 23 Savane diana ath e fep 163 AINGEE cie e tn ee re 104 ANTI FB ete 127 136 ASSIGN iai tuition in eis 82 150 ASSIGN 1 16 iue aa e Ced ers 155 ASSIGN 1 2 ES 174 ASSIGN HOLD rar enn le 50 167 ASSIGNABLE 152 153 ATTACK 106 107 111 118 120 135 137 152 ATTACK LENGTH 22 2 0000000000 000000000220 114 ATTACK LEVE D 106 114 AUTO WAH uenisse EB 127 129 B BALANCE Knob sese 13 106 ies n ire DERE 169 BANK LSB a aia 163 165 BANK MSB innert 163 165 BASIC CEDE iot trs 165 BASS Lis LI ense 102 109 141 143 145 BASS e e 141 BASS AMP MODERN ener 145 BASS AMP 2 144 PASS FR O 143 Bass G ltar ti tete quie ese tete teste teet 109 PASS ua itte coi epe tiber dd 101 BEN Dy 26 27 116 117 BEND THIN heroe 165 BEND TUNING 1st 6th 2 117 BG EEAJI 4 140 141 BODY
121. 64 as well as the STRING CH settings The V LINK screen appears 8 Press EXIT to return to the V LINK screen 9 Press F2 ASGN1 or F3 ASGN2 to select Assign 1 or Assign 2 CHIC SOURCE TARGET zz 4 Press F1 CLIP The PATCH CLIP screen appears cro OFF FADER B 10 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to set the source to be used in operating the target 5 Use F1 and F2 or the F1 or F2 knobs to set 11 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob to set the the palette and clip for V LINK Channel A set target the palette and clip for V LINK Channel B with gt F4 and F5 or the F4 or F5 knobs For more on the source and target parameters refer to V LINK PATCH p 174 Available V LINK Transmitted iba cd Setting Function Messages 12 Rotate the F3 knob to set the minimum value PALETTE 1 32 Changingthe Bank Select for the TARGET parameter s control range palette 00 1 OFF 1 32 Changing the Program Change 13 Rotate the F4 knob to set the maximum value clip 00H 1FH for the TARGET parameter s control range 6 Press EXIT to return to the V LINK screen 14 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 7 Press F4 STR CH to select the channel to be controlled with each string STRING CR Explanation 1st 6th 5 No channel is controlled ACH Channel A of the V LINK c
122. 7023 07 07 1N
123. 9 If using the VG 99 with an FC 300 connected also refer to Chapter 5 Using the VG 99 in Combination with an FC 300 p 52 Use of MIDI requires that the MIDI channels of connected devices be matched Data cannot be transmitted to or received from other MIDI devices unless the MIDI channels are set correctly Operating from the VG 99 Outputting Program Change Messages When a patch is selected with the VG 99 the VG 99 simultaneously transmits a Program Change message corresponding to the selected number The external MIDI device switches its settings in response to the received Program Change message 600 MIDI IN MIDI OUT Outputting Control Change Messages Data describing the action of an external device expression pedal or footswitch connected to the VG 99 is output as Control Change messages These messages can be used for such tasks as adjusting external MIDI devices parameters Outputting Performance Data The guitar s performance data can be output as Note messages and Bend messages allowing you to perform through synthesizer sound modules and other devices connected to the VG 99 For more detailed information refer to Playing an External Synthesizer Sound Module GUITAR TO MIDI p 64 Transmitting Data You can use Exclusive messages to transmit settings for effect sounds and other data stored in the VG 99 to other MIDI devices Th
124. 9 Connected to a Computer Via USB Setting the USB Functions The following section describes the VG 99 s USB related functions Make these settings in accordance with how you plan to use the VG 99 Setting the Digital Audio Signal Input and Output 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 ve CATEGORY NAME MISC mer us iirapeppp PUL INE ICHAT GR CHISE 3 Press F2 USB 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 IZE OUT OUT LEVEL 5 Change the setting s value with F1 F4 or the F1 F4 knobs 6 Press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen Parameter Range USB IN This sets the point at which digital audio signals received via USB from your computer are connected within the VG 99 Explanation Unless this is set to OFF make sure the software is not set to thru for audio signals Ifthe USB IN parameter is set to COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU the setting automatically changes to MAIN amp SUB the next time the VG 99 is powered up If you plan to use COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU make the setting each time you turn on the power to the VG 99 OFF The signals are not connected at any point COSM GTR A The signals are connected at the point where the COSM GUITAR A is output The audio output from the computer in stead of the COSM guitar sounds played by the connected guitar is in
125. 99 and FC 300 with a single cable This RRC2 function enables two way communications between the devices while further acting as a power supply to the FC 300 thus reducing the number of cables used to connect the devices Includes pitch MIDI conversion function The VG 99 can convert and output guitar performance data as MIDI information allowing you to connect a synthesizer sound module or similar device and use the setup as a guitar synthesizer Features V LINK function This function enables you to use performance data and pedal operations in controlling video V LINK V LINK is a function that allows music and images to be performed together By using MIDI to connect two or more V LINK compatible devices you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance Names of Things and What They Do Top Panel Roland O_z 2 VG 99 W Guitar System PATCH VALUE CATEGORY OUTPUT M D BEAM L PITCH FILTER EXIT PITCH FILTER ASSIGNABLE 4 ASSIGNABLE GUITAR TO MIDI SYSTEM GLOBAL T TUNER 2 29
126. AGE lt to go to Page 1 DELAY HO zr IS 3 Press F1 COMP The number and name of the currently selected Favorite Settings are displayed FAVORITE SETTING 1 FA COMP 01 miath COMP 5 Use F1 F4 or the F1 F4 knobs to adjust the desired parameters on Pages 1 and 2 6 To store the content of the settings carry out the steps described below 92 Chapter 8 Other Functions Saving Changed Tones There are two methods you can use to save changed tones Saving to Patches 1 Press WRITE The PATCH WRITE screen appears FAP WR a adita YES CHRITEI HO 2 Use the PATCH VALUE dial select the save destination patch 3 Press WRITE FRI 8 N HOH WRITING NOW WRITING is displayed as the patch is being saved and then the Play screen returns to the display NOTE Saving tones with this process undoes the link between the patch and the Favorite Settings Afterwards any changes to tones with Favorite Settings used earlier will not be reflected in the tone for this patch Saving to the Favorite Settings The following describes an example with the status indicated in the Compressor edit screen in Step 4 of Changing Tone Settings p 92 1 Press PAGE gt to display the last page in this case Page 3 2 Rotate the F1 SELECT knob to select FAVORITE WRITE The Favorite
127. AY 162 Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 MASTER MIXER A amp B TOTAL EQ A amp B EQ SW LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN LOW MID FREQ LOW MIDQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN TOTAL GAIN OUTPUT MAIN OUT MAIN LEVEL SUB OUT SUB LEVEL DOUT D OUT LEVEL A B BALANCE PATCH LEVEL MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide NAME KEY BPM PATCH NAME Parameter Explanation This sets the Patch name INSERT Insert a space at the cursor location DELETE Delete a character The characters that fol low get shifted to the left SPACE Input a space at the cursor location AO Switch between uppercase letters numbers and characters lt gt Switch between uppercase letters low ercase letters CATEGORY Sets the category for the current patch Refer to Separating Patches into Groups CATEGORY p 90 CATEGORY Parameter Explanation USER 1 10 This selects the Category name You can set USER1 USER10 in SYSTEM p 176 BASS SYNTH ROCK JAZZ ETHNIC DYNAMIC RIBBON KEY Parameter Explanation C Am B G m This sets the key for the COSM guitar and FX HARMONIST The key setting corresponds to the key of the song 8
128. Adjusts he speaker sections high sequen CENTER Simulates the condition that the micro ey tone phone is set in the middle of the speaker NUMBER cone x1 x2 x4 x8 Sets the number of speakers 1 10cm Simulates the condition that the micro CABINET phone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Selects the speaker cabinet type MIC LEVEL OPEN This is an open backed cabinet 0 100 Tum 1 h CLOSE This type of cabinet features an enclosed DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 1 Setting available when SP TYPE is set to CUSTOM 144 5 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide BASS AMP MODERN Parameter Explanation GAIN 0 100 Adjusts the distortion of the amp BASS 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range MIDDLE 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range MIDDLE FREQ Middle Frequency 220Hz 800Hz 3 0kHz This control adjusts the center frequency of the frequency range adjusted with the Mid dle control TREBLE 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Be careful not to raise the Level setting too high ENHANCER 0 100 This controls the clarity and presence of the sound SP TYPE Speaker Type Select the speaker type OFF This turns off the speaker simulator ORIG This is
129. C 300 2 FC 300 control pedal1 GK S1 GK 3 DOWN SI switch FC 300 CTL2 2 FC 300 control pedal2 GK 52 GK 3 UP S2 switch FC 300 E3 C3 3 FC 300 external expression pedal3 external Control button1 footswitch3 CTL2 Control button2 FC 300 2 FC 300 external footswitch4 EXP PEDAL Expression pedal connected to the EXP FC 300 E4 C5 3 FC 300 external expression pedal4 external PEDAL jack D BEAM V D BEAM vertical movements FC 300 CTL6 2 FC 300 external footswitch6 D BEAMH D BEAM horizontal movements FC 300 E5 C7 3 FC 300 external expression pedal5 external RIBBON ACT RIBBON CONTROLLER touch footswitch7 SPI RIBBON POS RIBBON CONTROLLER position FC 300 CTL8 2 FC 300 external footswitch8 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack 1 The types of parameters that can be set are the same as those jack tip described in EXP PEDAL Expression Pedal p 154 CTL4 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack jack ring 2 The types of parameters that can be set the same as those described in CTL3 CTL4 Control Control4 p 154 Pe so expression pedal FC 300 EXPSW1 FC 300 expression pedal switch1 3 Vit pedal is 2 ig Mx FC 300 EXP2 FC 300 expression pedal2 that can be set are the same as those described in Expression Pedal p 154 when a footswitch is connected EC 300 EOE expression pedal the types of parameters that can be set are the same a
130. Channel A and Channel B simultaneously PU SEL A Allows you to switch the pick PU SEL B ups in Channel A or Channel B S1 TUNER The TUNER screen is switched S2 BPM with S1 52 can be used for tap input of the BPM parameter PATCH LEVEL Provides control of the patch DEC INC level AB BALANCE Provides control of the volume toA toB balance between Channel A and Channel B The level from Channel A is increased with S1 the level from Channel B is increased with 52 MIDI START Transmits Start and Stop for STOP transmission of MIDI Realtime messages MMC PLAY Transmits Play and Stop for STOP transmission of MIDI Machine Control FC 300 Provides control of the FC 1 2 300 s AMP CONTROLI and CONTROL2 jacks This allows switching of the chan nels for guitar amps connected to these jacks PATCHSELECT Switches to higher patch num INC bers when patches are switched PATCH SELECT Switches to lower patch num DEC bers when patches are switched PU SEL Switches the Channel and toFRONT A amp B Channel B pickups towards the front PUSELtoREAR Switches the Channel A and A amp B Channel B pickups towards the rear PU SEL toFRONT A Switches the Channel A pickup towards the front PU SEL toREAR A Switches the Channel A pickup towards the rear PU SEL t
131. DYNA Balance Channel B the balance is controlled LOWER LEV Lower Level 1 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the sounds played softly You can adjust the A level when DYNA A is used and the B level when DYNA B is used LOWER BAL Lower Balance 2 0 100 100 0 Adjusts the balance between Channel A and B when sounds are played softly LOWER RNG Lower Range 0 99 This sets the point at which the strength of the picking begins to change from the soft sound s volume or balance to the louder sounds volume or balance When the volume is below the set point the volume or balance switches to that set in either LOWER LEV or LOWER BAL in ac cordance with the TYPE setting UPPER LEV Upper Level 1 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the sounds played loudly You can adjust the A level when DYNA A is used and the B level when DYNA B is used UPPER BAL Upper Balance 2 0 100 100 0 Adjusts the balance between Channel A and B when sounds are played loudly UPPER RNG Upper Range 1 100 This sets the point at which the strength of the picking begins to change from the loud sound s volume or balance to the softer sounds volume or balance When the volume is above the set point the volume or balance switches to that set in either LOWER LEV or LOWER BAL in ac cordance with the TYPE setting Parameter Explanation Range RELEASE 0 100 This adjust the rate of the
132. E to display Page 1 2S TEM x 3 SETTIHG svsre 1 GK SET 3 Use F1 SELECT or the 1 knob to select the setting Settings Explanation The presence of a GK connection is detected au tomatically and the internal settings are switched accordingly AUTO Settings appropriate for a GK connection are al ways used Settings appropriate for a GUITAR INPUT con nection are always used ON OFF You should ordinarily use AUTO the default setting In cases where the auto detect function does not operate correctly for example when you are using a Divided pickup other than the GK 3 pickup use F2 or the F2 dial to change the setting 45 gt fe E Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Using Different Guitar Settings in Each Patch SET MODE This setting determines whether the VG 99 uses a single global GK setting or if the GK settings can be specified individually for each patch 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 3 Use F3 SELECT or the F3 knob to select the setting Settings Explanation The GK SETTING set here is used globally for SYSTEM the entire VG 99 This is the default factory setting The GK Settings can be specified individually PATCH for each patch Use
133. E Parameter Explanation This sets the Category name INSERT Insert a space at the cursor location DELETE Delete a character The characters that fol low get shifted to the left SPACE Input a space at the cursor location AO Switch between uppercase letters numbers and characters lt gt Switch between uppercase letters and low ercase letters CATGRY Select the user category you want to name D BEAM CALIB D BEAM Calibration Parameter Explanation D BEAM DISAB D BEAM Disable You can disable the D BEAM controller for the entire device OFF The D BEAM is enabled ON The D BEAM is disabled Pressing the D BEAM PITCH FILTER or ASSIGNABLE button to switch the D BEAM controller on will have no effect PATCH EXTENT Parameter Explanation PATCH EXTENT can be switched You can set upper and lower limits to define the range of patches that FROM Set the lower limits to define the range of patches TO Set the upper limits to define the range of patches FACTORY RESET Parameter Range Explanation FACTORY RESET This restores the VG 99 to the settings it had when it was shipped from the factory ALL All data SYSTEM Content of the settings for the SYSTEM parameters HARMON
134. E 52 land s 120 guitar amp 4 Set the name using PAGE gt and F1 CAMP Use this setting when connecting to a F5 small guitar amp Use this setting when connecting to the guitar input of a combo amp other than Function Button Explanation the JC 120 guitar amp where the amp T 2 and speaker or speakers combined F1 INSERT Insert a space at the cursor location COMBO AMP a single unit Delete a character The characters that follow get shifted to the left F3 SPACE Input a space at the cursor location F2 DELETE Depending on your guitar amp you may be able to obtain good results with the JC 120 setting Switch between uppercase letters and F4 A0 Use this setting when connecting to the lowercase letters guitar input of a stack type guitar amp F5 A lt gt a Switch between uppercase letters low STACK AMP where the amp and speaker or speak x ercase letters numbers and characters ers are separated Use this setting when connecting to the RETURN of a JC 120 Use this setting when connecting to the oor RETURN with a combo amp Use this setting when connecting to the RETURN of a stack amp or the INPUT STACK Return of a rack mounted power amp Set to STACK Return also when using a guitar power amp and speaker cabinet combination Use this setting when using head phones or when connecting to a multi LI
135. EDIT You can assign parameters to the F1 F6 knobs to control the Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN These settings are made when parameters are to be controlled with the GK 3 VOLUME knob DOWN S1 UP S2 switches the VG 99 s CONTROL buttons an external pedal or other connected parameters as you play Additionally you can check display the assigned parameters by pressing F1 F6 controller or a connected MIDI device In addition to settings already assigned to controllers the VG 99 also 1 Press CONTROL ASSIGN features sixteen prepared general purpose control assigns that let you freely assign settings to controllers as you like 2 Press PAGE gt to go to the last page CONTROL If you intend to control the parameters of effects and the like be sure to set the effect to ON beforehand For more detailed information on the parameters refer to CONTROL ASSIGN 150 Enabling the settings requires setting each of the controller assignments to ASSIGNABLE in the SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN screen For detailed information refer to Setting the GK VOLUME Control and Switch and the Pedal Function SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN 49 3 Press F6 F1 F6 to enter the DIRECT EDIT screen 1 Press CONTROL ASSIGN The DIRECT EDIT screen appears CONTROL UI Fi Fz TARGET FARAMETER TARGET FARAMETER 2 Select the controller you want to set with PA
136. EI1 INTERVAL eere 131 VOICE2 INTERVAL eere 131 MOL ses i ci eter e 103 109 XOLD CURVE Een 103 139 Xolutne edu ad eue abit 20 Volume Balance ue s 33 Volume swell Effect essere 135 NOW EDT zo cete eee Coleen ces E 134 TOM F Z 1 2 eeu iii 134 W ee p cete e tete eld 122 WAEESW 4 1 6 n nennt eeu resiste 122 WARP iino bio ehh ah um e nnd 125 WARP SW en aire oa 125 WAVE re eo oie e 115 WAVE ATTACK eese enne 115 WANMEDBEGAY 4st e etai aa 115 MAVELEMEL n re e e RETIA 115 eee cette rares 95 WAVE SENS see 115 115 128 WRITE Bittorrent 13 MIS Y ie Oe alte imd estu eet EE teh es 123 X X OVER EREQ eher e tpfe eere 132 195 I MEMO 197 198 199 200 201 For China REESE A BEARS m 45 2007 EUR ALS a Br bb itj RA Gr FAL HA AR args AREK EP EUH Ba m DSR AS SU BREET BE ANE SMR AEE FRA A BLAS TEE KARER A
137. EL DEPTH 2 Set TYPE to HOLD in the Delay screen 07100 oe Hhevolumeotthewarpeddelay 3 Press the pedal to which REC is assigned Recording starts when you press the pedal MOD 4 Press pedal to which REC is assigned again to stop recording Parameter The maximum recording time is 2 8 seconds If the recording time Explanation Range exceeds 2 8 seconds the recording stops automatically and the MOD RATE Modulation Rate recorded content is then played back 0 100 Adjusts the modulation rate of the delay oscillating sound may be audible with extremely short recording sound times MOD DEPTH Modulation Depth 5 When layering recordings repeat Steps 4 and 5 0 100 Adjusts the modulation depth of the delay The recorded content is cleared when the TYPE or patch is switched to sound different setting or when the power is turned off 6 return to recording standby press the pedal to which STOP is assigned The unit returns to recording standby When playback is stopped the recorded content is erased You can also set REC SW MODE to MOMENT If you use this setting be sure to keep the pedal held down during recording gt o 1 Referring to Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 assign the 125 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide CHORUS In this effect a slightly detuned sound is added to the original sound to add dept
138. ENCE 6 Select the basic type with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob 7 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F5 or with the 1 5 knobs If there are other parameters you want to adjust press PAGE 5 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 as needed cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to WAH p 122 9 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 41 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM The parameters described in this chapter are saved when the power is turned off There is no need to carry out the Write procedure p 38 Inputting the Divided Pickup Settings To ensure optimal conditions for producing sounds with the VG 99 making the correct settings affecting the Divided pickup the GK settings is required Selecting the Settings The VG 99 can store ten separate sets of GK settings If you are playing more than one guitar using the VG 99 you can store separate settings for each one allowing you to be ready in moments with the necessary settings when the guitars are switched After you have finished inputting the various settings press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE to display Page 1 SYSTEM x E CONTRAST 15 H E i DIRECT GH MIDI 3 Press F3 GK to display
139. ETDOX gud LEAH ais HOTEL CA 1 JAZZ O24 5 CHICKEN ABCDEFGHIJKLMHOPGRSTUUWSY Bers The categories and the patches in these categories are shown in list format 4 Press F6 CATGRY The Category settings popup appears 3 Use F1 SEL V and F2 SEL A or the F1 MANE F2 knobs to select the category CATEGORY ROCK 4 Use the PATCH VALUE dial or F3 SEL Y F4 SEL to select a patch RBCDEFGHIJKLMHOPGRSTUTM 5 Press CATEGORY again 5 Use the F6 knob to select the category The VG 99 switches to the selected patch MEMO 6 Press EXIT MEMO The cat i NM atch If no operation if performed within a set period of time uc RP qM the display returns to the Play screen 7 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 8 Other Functions Naming User Categories CATEGORY NAME 1 Confirm that the Play screen is displayed 2 Press SYSTEM 3 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 SYSTEM CATEGORY NAME MISC iirapeppp 4 Press F4 CATGRY The Category Name settings screen appears CATEGORY USER 1 RBCDEFGHIJKLMHOPGORST UMSXVZ zracE ae a 5 Use F6 or the F6 knob to select User Category with the name yo
140. EVEL Simulates the distance between the mic and speaker 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Off MIC This setting points the mic away from the Be careful not to raise the Level setting too speaker high On MIC Provides conditions whereby the mic is di BRIGHT rected more towards the speaker T bebri Tof vie urns the bright setting on off Hosmon OFF Bright is not used Thus Sirhulates thie DSTORE Bright is switched on to create lighter and CENTER Simulates the condition that the micro crisper tone phone is set in the middle of the speaker RESPONSE 1 10cm Simulates the condition that the micro BASS FLAT This controls the overall amp characteris phone is moved away from the center of the tics Select the position corresponding to the speaker cone for one of the two types of sound MIC LEVEL SP TYPE Speaker Type 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Select the speaker type Parameter Om This turns off the speaker simulator Range xplanation ORIG aes is x 1 jeep Ed the amp you selected wit CUSTOM SPEAKER 1 1x15 Models the Trace Elliot 1518 SIZE 1x18 Models the SWR Big Ben 5 15 Selects the size of speaker 2x15 Models the Acoustic 402 LOW 4x10 Models the SWR Goliath 10 10 Adjusts the speaker section s low frequency 8x10 Models the Ampeg 810E MIC POS Mic Position HIGH This simulates the microphone position
141. F minimum value and ON maximum val ue each time the footswitch is pressed RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH Low 0 126 High 1 127 You can set the controllable range for target parameters within the source s operational range Target parameters are controlled within the range set with RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH You should normally set RANGE LOW to 0 and RANGE HIGH to 127 TRIGGR Trigger This sets the trigger that activates the internal pedal 1 PATCH CHANGE Functions when patches are switched GK VOL Functions when the divided pickup s vol ume knob is adjusted GK 51 52 Functions when the divided pickup s DOWN S1 or UP S2 switch position is changed CTLI CTL4 Functions when the CTL 1 2 buttons or foot switch connected to CTL 3 4 jack are operat ed Functions when the expression pedal con nected to EXP PEDAL jack are operated D BEAM Functions when the vertical or horizontal position is detected by the D Beam control ler RIBBON ACT POS Functions when the ribbon controller is op erated by touch or when the position is de tected FC 300 EXP1 EXP2 Functions when the FC 300 s EXP PEDAL 1 or 2 is operated FC 300 CTL1 CTL2 Functions when the FC 300 s or CTL2 is operated 300 E3 C3 CTL4 Functions when a pedal connected to the E4 C5 CTL6 E5 C7 FC 300 s E3 C3 CTL4 E4 C5 CTL6 E5 CTL8 C7 or CTL8 jacks i
142. F1 or the F1 knob The value in the MIXER screen is disregarded and instead the SYSTEM value is applied The value in the MIXER screen is disregarded and instead the value lt gt is applied You can give names to the patches you create NAME KEY BPM exe Press PAGE lt 4 gt to move the cursor to the position at which you want to change a character Select the character with the PATCH VALUE dial As you continue to rotate the PATCH VALUE dial the character guide automatically switches from uppercase letters to lowercase letters numerals and symbols You can use the following convenient operations by pressing F1 F5 Function Button Description F1 INSERT Inserts a blank space at the cursor position Deletes the character and shifts the charac F2 DELETE ters that follow to the left F3 SPACE Inserts a blank space at the cursor position Switches between letters numerals and F4 symbols Switches between uppercase and lower F5 A lt gt a case letters Sets the category for the current patch Re gee fer to Setting Patch Categories p 90 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to complete the patch name If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 37 Saving a Patch WRITE
143. F2 knob COSH FREAMF AMF zu TYPE OFF Bg r CUSTOM PO 4 Press PAGE gt to display Page 2 A LT CUSTOM HF CUSTOM TYFE r JC CLEAN 5 Select the basic preamp type to customize with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob 6 Press PAGE gt to display Page 3 ra COSH AMP STM Enzz TREBLE EUGE FREG FF EG 7 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs If there are other parameters you want to adjust press PAGE gt 8 Repeat Steps 5 7 as needed cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to COSM p 140 39 Chapter 3 Creating Your Own Effect Types CUSTOMIZE Customizing the Speaker You cannot customize the speaker when BASS AMP VINTAGE or BASS AMP MODERN is selected with PREAMP TYPE 1 Press COSM AMP The COSM AMP Edit screen appears 2 Press PAGE lt gt to display the Speaker Type selection screen COSM I LO u DIRECT LEVEL 3 Select CUSTOM as the SP TYPE with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob 4 Press PAGE gt to display the speaker customization screen F CABI SIZE Low HIGH NUMBER HET 9 aN 5 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F5 or with the F1 F5 knobs Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to COSM p 140 6 If you want to save
144. F5 SELECT or the F5 or knob to select the function you want to assign If you want to be able to assign the functions for the controllers on an individual patch basis set Control Assign to ASSIGNABLE PATCH With Control Assign set to ASSIGNABLE PATCH the unit operates in accordance with the assignments set in each patch as described in Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 With other settings the assignment settings in the patches are disregarded cf gt For information on assigned controllers refer to Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 for more on assignable parameters refer to Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Separate Controllers p 168 49 e m fo Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Having Values from an External Pedal GK VOLUME Control or Other Controller Carried Over When Patches are Called Up ASSIGN HOLD This setting determines whether or not the current settings for each controller the expression pedals the FC 300 s expression pedals control pedals or other controllers are applied to the patch when patches are switched Assign Hold is not performed when the SW MODE parameter in Control Assign Source is set to LATCH LATCH toggles between the minimum and maximum value each time the switch is pressed 1 Press SYSTEM
145. FECT LEVEL NS SW THRSH REL DETECT FV LEVEL VOL CURVE A COSM AMP B COSM AMP COMMON COSM AMP SW PREAMP TYPE PREAMP GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE PRESENCE LEVEL BRIGHT GAIN SW PREAMP SOLO SW LEVEL SPEAKER SP TYPE MIC TYPE MIC DIS MIC POS MIC LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL PREAMP CUSTOM CUSTOM TYPE BOTTOM EDGE BASS FREQ TREBLE FREQ LOW HIGH SPEAKER CUSTOM SIZE LOW HIGH NUMBER CABINET 161 Q E o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A COSM AMP B COSM AMP BASS AMP GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE LEVEL BRIGHT MIDDLE FREQ RESPONSE ENHANCER BASS AMP SP SP TYPE MIC POS MIC LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL DELAY REVERB DELAY DELAY SW TIME FEEDBACK HIGH CUT LEVEL REVERB REVERB SW TYPE TIME PREDELAY LOW CUT HIGH CUT DENS LEVEL DYNAMIC DYNA SW TYPE LOWER RNG UPPER RNG A LOWER LEV A UPPER LEV B LOWER LEV B UPPER LEV LOWER BAL UPPER BAL RELEASE A MIXER B MIXER MIX SW PAN LEVEL DELAY SEND REVERB SEND CH DEL
146. FIK 3 Use or the knob to set whether or not the Receive Program Change Map is used gt Description Settings The VG 99 switches to the patches predetermined for the corresponding received Program Change FIX messages regardless of the Receive Program Change Map settings The VG 99 switches to the patches set in the Receive PROG Program Change Map 4 Tochange the patch assigned to a received Program Number press LEFT RIGHT to display Page 6 The RX PC MAP screen appears ERE sw ed iJ Gua tar d z Fat LF amaziRETUOX cod CH macizLDBH MEZHL LR ERHE 5 Assign the patch to received Program Number F1 BANK F1 Knob Selects the Bank number F2 SEL V or F3 SEL F2 or Knob Selects the Program number F5 SELECT F5 Knob Selects the patch When the combination of the Bank number and Program number selected with F1 F2 and F3 is received the VG 99 switches to the patch selected with F5 61 Chapter 6 Using MIDI The table below shows the correspondence between the factory default Program change Map and the Program Change messages received when RX PC MAP is set to FIX Bank Select Program Patch Number Number 0 1 001 0 128 128 1 101 128 328 1 301 3 100 400 3 128 400
147. GE lt gt and F1 F6 The various controllers setting screens appear GUITAR CAICOSM GUITAR E GTA GTR E GTR am FU SEL The following section describes the controllers you can set CONTROL 1 GE ET 52 4 Press Page 4 gt to go to the page for the knob you want to set i z 5 Use the F1 F6 or F1 F6 knobs to select the parameters you want to assign to the knob Displayed Controller screen 6 If you want to save the edited settings Settings for the volume knob on the perform the Write procedure p 38 GREVOLAGRYOE GK 3 not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen Settings for the switches on the 1 S2 GKS1 S2 Settings for the CONTROL 1 But ton on the VG 99 s top panel Settings for the CONTROL 2 But ton on the VG 99 s top panel CTL1 CONTROL1 CTL2 CONTROL2 82 Chapter 8 Other Functions CONTROL CONTROL ASSIGNABLE E 14 14 Displayed Controller screen PITCH D BEAM T ARM with the D Beam control D BEAM FREEZE ler FILTER DBEAM FILTER Control of FILTER with the D Beam controller DBMV DBEAMV D Beam controller vertical sensor DBMH DBEAMH controller horizontal sen screen Controller PITCH RIBBON PITCH Control of PITCH with the Ribbon contr
148. GE lt several times to display Page 1 fe COSM GTR COSHH GTR SW TYPE 3 Use F1 ON OFF or the F1 knob to switch the COSM GUITAR ON OFF setting 4 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob to select the Modeling type 5 Use SELECT or the knob to select the COSM GUITAR type 6 Press PAGE gt Each press of PAGE We takes you to the next screen in which parameter settings are made 7 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs 8 Adjust the parameters until you achieve the sound you want Lef gt For detailed information about each of the parameters refer to COSM GUITAR p 101 9 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen 25 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting the Alternate Tuning About Alternate Tuning Maybe insert a sentence in the beginning of this The Alternate Tuning feature allows you to change the tuning of a COSM guitar without changing the actual pitch of the guitar s strings To accomplish this the VG 99 analyzes the pitch of the signals transmitted by the divided pickup for each individual string while keeping best possible sound quality Alternate Tuning includes the following five functions TUNING Use this to convert the tuning to open tunings such as OPEN D and OPEN G raise or lower all of the strings an octav
149. Guitar mezi Fat LP Ber REHAVOS Bed maesiJn AC_Gt CH DIR PATCH DIR FATCH DIR PATCH 4 Use the F1 F5 knobs to select the patches to be assigned to DIRECT PATCH 1 DIRECT PATCH 5 The numbers correspond with DIR PATCH 1 assigned with the F1 knob DIR PATCH 2 assigned with the F2 knob and so on 5 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Chapter 8 Other Functions Managing the Patches Copying the Current Patch to a Different Patch PATCH COPY 1 Confirm that the Play screen is displayed 2 Press WRITE The PATCH WRITE screen appears WRITE is displayed and the write destination patch number and name are indicated FAP HEIIE a AAi adit YES CHRITEI HO MAME 3 Use the PATCH VALUE dial to select the copy destination patch 4 Press WRITE again The message NOW WRITING is displayed as the patch is copied and the VG 99 changes to the copy destination patch number FAP WR a HOM WRITING If you are not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen Exchanging the Current Patch with a Different Patch PATCH EXCHANGE This exchanges the user patch with the different patch You cannot exchange tones in preset patches 1 Confirm that the Play screen for a user patch is displayed 2 Press WRITE 3 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 EXCHANGE is dis
150. HOLD CTL is assigned are enabled simultaneously with parameters set in the SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN settings p 167 Set CONTROL ASSIGN to OFF if you want to use only the Hold function cf gt You can select the way the Hold function operates For more details refer to Selecting How the Hold Functions HOLD TYPE p 69 Thinning Out Bend Messages BEND THIN Vibrato slides and other such data in guitar performances are output as Pitch Bend messages For this reason the receiving MIDI device may encounter problems with operation when Pitch Bend messages containing large amounts of data are included You can use the BEND THIN function to thin out the Pitch Bend messages and control the volume of MIDI data 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Selecting the Controller Used to Control the Hold Function HOLD CTL p 65 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen GTR TO HIDI HOLD BASIC CTL HAZE ON CTL Bid ON ich 3 ZELECTNOFF OHNRZELECTROFF OH 2 Setthe function to ON with F2 OFF ON or the F2 knob Select OFF when you do not want to reduce the amount of data transmitted in the Pitch Bend messages 65 Chapter 6 Using MIDI Setting the MIDI Transmit Channel BASIC CH This sets the MIDI channel used for output of string performance data from the VG 99 Set the MIDI channels according to the POLY MONO mode as shown below When set to POLY mode The
151. I the MIDI Note messages is excessively low or high due to the influence of the Channel A Alternate Tuning settings the pitch is then automatically set one octave higher or lower Setting AB LINK Setting AB LINK to ON allows you to use the same TUNING and BEND settings for COSM GUITAR A and COSM GUITAR B When this is set to OFF you can use different settings for COSM GUITAR A and COSM GUITAR B 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 ALT TUM TS 1 11 EEHNLD 3 Switch AB LINK on or off with F1 OFF ON or the F1 knob Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 116 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting TUNING 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 ra TUM IHG Setting BEND 1 Press ALTERNATE TUNING 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 ALT TONINHO a or TUNING 3 Select A or B with F2 A B or the F2 knob You cannot select this when LINK is 4 Switch the function on or off with the F3 knob 5 Select the tuning TYPE with F4 TYPE or the F4 knob You can set original user tunings when USER is selected for TYPE p 29 e Press USER Set the desired parameter with F1 F6 or with the 1 6 knobs e Press EXIT 6 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ify
152. I Foot Controller 5 etc BOSS FS 6 etc FC 300 for Normal Guitar 16 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections This instrument is equipped with balanced type jacks TRS CTL3 4 XLR SUB OUT Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect COLD TIP HOT CTL3 GND RING CTL4 N SLEEVE GND To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration Cord Hook The cord of the supplied AC Adaptor the Power Outlet USE ROLAND f PSBAU ADAPTOR ONLY Use only the specified expression pedal Roland EV 5 BOSS FS 500L 500H with a connection cable stereo 1 4 phone stereo 1 4 phone sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup you may experience a discomforting sensation or perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device micro phones connected to it or the metal portions of oth
153. ID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Parameter Explanation STRING PAN 1st 6th 100 0 100 0 This sets the left right pan of each string The pan effect is cancelled if a monaural effect e or COSM amp is connected after the COSM GUITAR effect E STRING LEVEL 1st 6th D 0 100 Specifies the output level of each string 2 109 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM GUITAR Explanation MIX LEVEL COSM GUITAR 0 100 Specifies the level of the COSM GUITAR NORMAL PU Normal Pickup 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the normal pickup Parameter Explanation Range NS Noise Suppressor SYNTH Synthesizer Setting the parameter of synthesizer sound GR 300 Parameter Range Explanation MODE This setting determines whether the HEXA VCO sawtooth wave or the HEXA DISTORTION rectangular wave is played or if both are played This effect reduces the noise and hum picked up by guitar pickups Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the guitar sound the way in which the guitar sound decays over time it has very little effect on the guitar sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound SW
154. IDI OUT MAIN Signals from the VG 99 are output USB MIDI signals received via USB are output MIDI The MIDI signals received at MIDI IN are output from MIDI OUT thru When other signals also are set to be output simultaneously from MIDI OUT the signals are mixed and then output together merge 1 16ch This sets the channel used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages When controlling another synthesizer sound module using the GUITAR TO MIDI function also refer to GUITAR TO MIDI p 164 OMNI MODE OFF ON When MIDI OMNI MODE is set to ON messages are received on all MIDI channels regardless of the MIDI channel settings DEVICE ID 1 32 This sets the Device ID used for transmis sion and reception of Exclusive messages SYNC CLOCK RRC2 The MIDI signals received at through RRC2 are output from MIDI OUT thru When other signals also are set to be output simultaneously from MIDI OUT the signals are mixed and then output together merge This setting determines the basis used for synchronizing the timing for effect modulation rates and other time based parameters USB MIDI This sets the routing of signals received via USB INTERNAL Operations are synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock OFF Signals are not received via USB AUTO USB Operations are synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via USB However opera t
155. IE ORI A 184 NG 997 V Guitar SYSTE ie eee cete d eain o acct pr t e A Here m eie 184 VG 99 Software System Requirements nennen nennen nennen 185 For Windows toe tios rte tem i tete te bd e Pete te ena fere t ee 185 Mac matesmttibeu uet A e nie tam ava ati dati 185 Error Messages ep reque ed deeem acu pet atras 186 Troubleshooting ose eie t tatis deas 186 Problems with Sounds eite td orti ipd ivre ted ascent 186 Other Problems iod a anten ren 188 jJ E 189 10 Main Features Ultimate guitar modeling system provides unlimited possibilities in creating sounds The VG 99 is the culmination of Roland s COSM technology based guitar modeling systems Featuring advanced software supported by the very latest custom DSP chips the instrument also offers a large sized high contrast LCD top quality AD DA converters balanced XLR output connectors digital output connectors USB connector and other features that all add up to a truly pro spec system About COSM Composite Object Sound Modeling Composite Object Sound Modeling or COSM for short is BOSS Roland s innovative and powerful technology that s used to digitally recreate the sound of classic musical instruments and effects COSM analyzes the many factors that make up the original sound including its electrical and physical characteristics and creates a digital model that accurately repro
156. IST scales AUTO RIFF phrases preamps and speakers overdrive distortion and wah custom edit parameters GK SETTING Content of the settings for GK SETTING GLOBAL GLOBAL function settings PATCH Settings for patch numbers 001 200 FAVORITE SETTING Content of the settings in FAVORITE SETTINGS 01 10 for all effects 176 GLOBAL Chapter 9 Parameter Guide ce Ke 7 5 Parameter Explanation MAIN OUTPUT SELECT This selects the type of device to be connected JC 120 Set this when connecting a Roland JC 120 guitar amp SMALL AMP Use this setting when connecting a compact guitar amp COMBO AMP Set this when connecting to the guitar input for a combo type guitar amp combining amp and speakers single unit other than a JC 120 You may find that setting this to JC 120 may produce good results with your guitar amp STACK AMP Use this setting when connecting to the gui tar input for a stack type guitar amp in which the amp and speakers are separated JC 120 RETURN Set this when connecting to the JC 120 s RE TURN COMBO RETURN Set this when connecting to the RETURN on another combo type amp STACK RETURN Set this when connecting to the RETURN on a stack type amp Set STACK RETURN even when using a power amp for the guitar in combination with a speaker cabinet LINE PHONES Use this setting when using headphones or whe
157. ITAL OUT Connector Digital audio signals are output here p 37 p 147 9 EXP PEDAL EXPRESSION PEDAL Jack Connect an optional expression pedal such as a Roland EV 5 here p 16 The VG 99 is set at the factory so that the pedal is automatically enabled to function as a foot volume 14 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds Installing the Divided Pickup First install the GK 3 divided pickup optional on the guitar to be used For installation instructions refer to the GK 3 Owner s Manual NOTE The GK 3 cannot be used with the following guitars the pickup will not function properly even when installed e 12 string guitars pedal steel guitars and guitars with other than six strings Nylon stringed or gut stringed guitars and guitars using any non steel strings Bass guitars Other guitars whose construction does not provide adequate space to properly attach the GK 3 About the GK 3 s GK Volume Control With the VG 99 you can assign various different functions to the GK 3 s volume control p 82 You may not be able to control the VG 99 s volume level with the GK volume control another parameter is assigned to the GK volume control About the GK 3 s Select Switches As the VG 99 allows you to set the balance between the COSM guitar and the normal guitar volume in each individual patch we recommend that MIX be the basic function used for the select switch Also note that if a parameter other than vol
158. ITE SET TING SYSTEM SYSTEM parameters GK SETTING Settings content for GK SETTING GLOBAL GLOBAL function settings PATCH Settings for patch numbers 001 200 FAVORITE Settings content in FAVORITE SETTINGS 01 SETTING 10 for all effects How to Transmit the Data When Saving Data to a MIDI Sequencer Connect the devices as shown below then place the MIDI sequencer in standby mode so it is ready to receive Exclusive messages Ljoooo o do mini iN out For information on how to operate the sequencer you are using refer to the owner s manual that came with it Chapter 6 Using MIDI When Transmitting Data to Another VG 99 Bulk Load Connect the devices as shown below then match the Device IDs for Reception of VG 99 data saved to MIDI sequencers and other the transmitting and receiving devices devices is referred to as bulk load When Receiving Data Saved to a MIDI Sequencer 1 Connect the devices as shown below Set the VG 99 s Device ID to the same one used when the data was transmitted to the MIDI sequencer 6 OUT 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt gt to display Page 8 SYSTEM EULE DUMP fp 1 a 2 Transmit the bulk data from the MIDI SYSTEM SETTING sequ
159. ITIALIZING 88 Copying Settings Between Channel A and Channel B A B COPY 1 Go to the settings screen for the parameters whose settings you want to copy 2 Press PAGE several times to go to the last page 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select A B COPY at OSM HD CIPY BE Ln n BE COSH GUITAR CA COSH GUITAR 4 Press F6 EXEC to copy the settings Exchanging the Channel A and Channel B Settings A B EXCHANGE 1 Go to the settings screen for the parameters whose settings you want to exchange 2 Press PAGE gt several times to go to the last page 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select A B EXCHNG COSM GUITAR CA COSH GUITAR 4 Press F6 EXEC to exchange the settings Chapter 8 Other Functions Pa rtia ly Copyi ng Pa ra meters in The following parameters can be handled as modules a Different Patch MODULE COPY ALTERNATE TUNING COSM GUITAR You can copy and reuse portions of patch parameters such as patch SOLVEX COSM amps effects and other modules Overall FX for Channel A and B Each of the effects in FX 1 Go to the settings screen for the parameters whose settings you want to copy E AMI MIXER section DELAY and REVERB 2 Press PAGE several times to go to the MIXER section DYNAMIC last page 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select MODULE COPY The MODULE COPY screen appears M
160. IVE BAL LEVEL POLY OCTAVE 1st 6th 2 1st 6th DIRECT 1st 6th POLY SLOW GEAR RISE TIME SENS A COMP SW TYPE SUSTAIN ATTACK THRSH REL TONE LEVEL 159 Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A FX B FX OD DS OD DS SW TYPE DRIVE BOTTOM TONE EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL OD DS CUSTOM TYPE BOTTOM TOP LOW HIGH WAH WAHSW TYPE PEDAL POS LEVEL WAH CUSTOM TYPE Q RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH PRESENCE EQ EQ SW LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN LOW MID FREQ LOW MID LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID FREO HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN LOW CUT HIGH CUT TOTAL GAIN DELAY DELAY SW TYPE DELAY TIME TAP TIME FEEDBACK HIGH CUT EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL DELAY DELAY1 DELAY DELAY2 TIME FEEDBACK HIGH CUT LEVEL DELAY WARP WARP SW RISE TIME FB DEPTH LEVEL DEPTH DELAY MOD MOD RATE MOD DEPTH Q E o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MASTER Para
161. L 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CROATIA ART CENTAR Degenova 3 HR 10000 Zagreb TEL 1 466 8493 CZECH REP CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR s r o Voct rova 247 16 CZ 180 00 PRAHA 8 CZECH REP TEL 2 830 20270 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND ROLAND POLSKA SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska
162. L1 LEVEL2 1 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the pitch shift sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound PITCH SHIFT1 PITCH SHIFT2 MODE1 MODE2 1 FX Effects HARMONIST Harmonist is an effect where the amount of shifting is adjusted according to an analysis of the guitar input allowing you to create harmonics based on diatonic scales Because of the need to analyze the pitch chords two or more sounds played simultaneously cannot be played You cannot use the Harmonist effect with audio input via USB IN Parameter Range Explanation KEY C Am B G m Specify the key of the song you are playing By specifying the key you can create har monies that fit the key of the song This KEY parameter is the same as the Key setting in the NAME KEY BPM section p 163 and FX MOD1 2 HARMONIST Altering either one changes the key Selection for the pitch shifter mode FAST MEDIUM A chord can be input with a normal pitch SLOW shifter The response is slower in the order of FAST MEDIUM and SLOW but the modulation is lessened in the same order MONO MONO is used for inputting single notes You may be unable to produce the intended effect when playing chords two or more notes played simultaneously PITCH 1 PITCH2 1 24 24 Adjusts the amount of pitch shift the amount of interval in semitone steps FINE1 FI
163. MIDI function and refer to Controlling Video Images with Your Guitar V LINK p 96 if you are using the V LINK function 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 3 Rotate the F1 knob to set the MIDI channel 1 16 Be sure not to set the same MIDI channel as the channel used for the GUITAR TO MIDI or V LINK functions Chapter 6 Using MIDI MIDI Omni Mode When set to MIDI Omni mode the VG 99 receives messages on all MIDI channels regardless of the MIDI channel settings You can use Omni mode whenever you do not need to use specific MIDI channels in controlling the VG 99 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 SYSTEM airt s CU MIDI OMHI DEVICE CH HODE Tch 1 3 OFF OM 3 Set Omni mode or off with F2 or the F2 knob Even with Omni mode set to ON the only Exclusive messages received will be those carrying the Device ID set for Device ID Omni mode is set to ON at the factory MIDI Device ID This sets the Device ID to be used for the transmission and reception of Exclusive messages Device ID is set to 1 at the factory 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 3 Rotate th
164. MIXER eee baad eas 2 The mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL BAL are also reflected here TAL EQ MIXER DRY This outputs the post A B mix signals be HORE fore application of DELAY REVERB MIXER This outputs the post A B mix signals after SUROUL OU E application of DELAY REVERB and TO d TAL FQ D OUT LEVEL Digital Out Level MAIN LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the level to DIGITAL OUT 0 200 Adjusts the level to MAIN LEVEL The parameters enabled MAIN OUT MAIN LEVEL SUB OUT SUB OUT SUB LEVEL D OUT R OUT LEVEL change according to the OUTPUT MODE settings This switches the signals output to SUB OUT When they are disabled the value lt gt is given CHA This outputs Channel A mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL B BAL are also reflected here CHB This outputs Channel B The mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL are also reflected here MIXER DRY This outputs the post A B mix signals be fore application of DELAY REVERB MIXER This outputs the post A B mix signals after application of DELAY and TO TAL EQ SUB LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the level to SUB OUT LEVEL 172 SYSTEM Chapter 9 Parameter Guide USB Parameter Range Explanation USB IN This sets the point at which digital audio signals received via USB from your computer are connected within the VG 99 Unless this is set to OFF make sur
165. Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO o Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 181 Chapter 10 Appendices V LINK Correspondence Table V LINK Function Transmitted MIDI Message Transmitted Channel These are used with models such as the DV 7PR or the motion dive tokyo performance package PALETTE 1 32 Palette Change CC 0 Bank Select MSB 0 31 ch B CC 32 Bank Select LSB 0 CLIP 1 32 Clip Change Program Change 0 31 ch A ch B These are used with the motion dive tokyo performance package COLOR EQ FG CC 1 Modulation COLOR EQ BG SCRTCH SW SPEED KNOB TOTAL FADER CROSS FADER BPM SYNC ch A amp ch B CC 71 Resonance CC 3 CC 8 Balance CC 10 Panpot ch A amp ch B ch A amp ch B ch A amp ch B CC 11 Expression CC 64 Hold 1 CLIP LOOP CC 65 Portamento ASSIGN KNOB CC 72 Release FADE TIME CC 73 VISUAL KNOB CC 74 AB SW CC 81 TAP SW CC 83 General Purpose 8 TOTAL SELECT CC 85 FX SELECT CC 86 PLAY POS CC 91 Reverb Ch A amp ch B LOOP START CC 92 LOOP END CC 93 Chorus Ch A amp ch B LAYER MODE CC 94 Celeste These are used with models such as the DV 7PR PLAY SPEED CC 8 Balance DISLV TIME CC 73 Attack T BAR CC 11 Expression COLOR Cb COLOR Cr BRIGHTNESS VFX 1 VFX 2 VFX ch A amp ch B ch A amp ch B ch A amp ch B olo radi Ead 2 A Attack
166. Models the SWR SM 400 MIDDLE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range TREBLE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range PRESENCE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Be careful not to raise the Level setting too high BRIGHT Turns the bright setting on off 1 OFF Bright is not used ON Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone GAIN SW LOW MIDDLE HIGH Provides for selection from three levels of distortion LOW MIDDLE and HIGH Dis tortion will successively increase for set tings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to MIDDLE So normally set it to MIDDLE SOLO SW OFF ON Pressing SOLO switches the tone to one suitable for solos SOLO LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume level when the Solo switch is ON 1 The BRIGHT parameter setting is only partially available with some JC CLEAN CRUNCH or BASS AMP settings in PREAMP TYPE 141 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM AMP Explanation Range SP TYPE Speaker Type Select the speaker type OFF This turns off the speaker simulator ORIG This is the built in speaker of the amp you selected with PREAMP TYPE 1x8 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 8 in
167. Modulation This automatically changes the VCF cutoff frequency according to the amplitude of the string vibration This allows you to change the tone with a wah like effect each time you pick a string SW Switch OFF Envelope modulation is not used ON This causes the VCF cutoff frequency to change from a high to low frequency each time the string is picked This produces a wah like effect with the sound going from low frequencies to high Setting the cutoff frequency to an extremely high value makes the effect difficult to discern INV As opposed to the ON setting this allows you to have the VCF cutoff frequency change from a low to high frequency each time the string is picked This produces a reverse wah like effect with the sound going from high frequencies to low 4 Setting the cutoff frequency to relatively high value makes the effect easier to discern 110 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Parameter Explanation SENS Sensitivity Parameter Explanation SWEEP 0 100 Adjusts the input sensitivity for the enve lope modulation function As the value is raised the change from the envelope modu lation broadens with even weaker picking lt i Confirm the change in the tone as you make the adjustment Try setting the value near 0 then gradually raise it as you pick a string Setting the attack time
168. N Down Minimum 50 50 S TYPE B This sets the pitch when T ARM is first acti TYPE F TYPE vated the minimum value Setting a negative value causes the pitch to rise while positive values produce lowered pitches 24 24 TRANS DOWN MAX Down Maximum 50 50 S TYPE B This sets the pitch when T ARM is most ful TYPE F TYPE ly applied the maximum value Setting a negative value causes the pitch to rise while positive values produce lowered pitches 24 24 TRANS 151 Q o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MASTER Parameter Range Explanation FREEZE CH Freeze Channel This selects the channel to which the FREEZE effect is applied A FREEZE is applied only to Channel A B FREEZE is applied only to Channel B A B FREEZE is applied to both Channel A and B ATTACK 0 100 This sets the attack time for the FREEZE sound when FREEZE is switched on Rais ing the value increases the attack time REL Release 0 100 This sets the time for the FREEZE sound to be released when FREEZE is switched off Raising the value increases the attack time LEVEL 0 100 This sets the volume level of the freeze sound The volume increases as the value is raised DIRECT 0 100 This sets the volume level of the direct sound The volume increases as the value is raised FILTER This passes only portions of
169. N Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER SW MODE Switch Mode This sets the behavior of the value each time the switch is operated MOMENT The setting is normally OFF minimum val ue switching to ON maximum value while the footswitch is held down LATCH The setting alternately switches to OFF minimum value and ON maximum val ue each time the footswitch is pressed 154 MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide FC 300 CONTROL ASSIGN 1 16 The controllers sources controlling targets when a FC 300 is connected are shown below You can freely assign functions to the VG 99 s and FC 300 s controllers Source Explanation Parameter Explanation FC 300 1 1 FC 300 expression pedal1 Range FC 300 EXPSWI 2 FC 300 expression pedal switch1 SOURCE FC 300 EXP2 1 FC 300 expression pedal2 This selects the controller to which the function is assigned FC 300 EXPSW2 2 FC 300 expression pedal switch2 GK VOL GK 3 GK volume knob F
170. NE PHONES track recorder for recording When using COSM Speaker cabinets use the LINE PHONES setting 47 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Adjusting the Overall Tone GLOBAL EQ Both MAIN OUT and SUB OUT feature four band EQs EQ MAIN is applied to the output from MAIN OUT EQ SUB is applied to the output from SUB OUT 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 2 5 GLOBAL it LPIA MATH TOTAL EG gt SAIH OFFER OFF ORM 3 Use F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs to adjust the tone Parameter Range MAIN EQ Main Equalizer SUB EQ Sub Equalizer A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be fore it is output MAIN EQ SW Main Equalizer Switch SUB EQ SW Sub Equalizer Switch Explanation OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected the centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gai
171. NE2 1 The key setting corresponds to the key of the song b as follows Major F E gt Fm B m 50 50 Make fine adjustments to the interval The amount of the change in the Fine 100 is Major G D A E B i 1h du Minor Em Bm Fm Dfm VOICE Selects the number of voices for the pitch shift sound equivalent to that of the Pitch 1 PRE DELAY1 PR E DELAY2 1 0 ms 300 ms BPM BPM J Adjusts the time from when the direct sound is heard until the pitch shifted sounds are inputted Normally you can leave this set at Oms 1VOICE One voice pitch shifted sound output in monaural When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the 2MONO Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output in monaural 2ST 2Stereo Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output through left and right channels FEEDBACK 0 100 Adjusts the feedback amount of the har song settings it is then sync time Tf due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable hronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that moni
172. ODULE COPY FROM PATCH SCE COSM GUITAR CA COSH GUITAR ERI 4 Use F2 PATCH or the F2 knob and F3 SOURCE or the F3 knob to select the copy Source 5 Press F6 EXEC to copy the settings Partially Initializing Patch Parameters MODULE INITIALIZE 1 Goto the settings screen for the parameter whose settings you want to initialize 2 Press PAGE gt several times to go to the last page 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select MODULE INIT The MODULE INITIALIZE screen appears 4 Press F6 EXEC to initialize the settings 89 Chapter 8 Other Functions Separating Patches into Setting Patch Categories Grou ps CATEGO RY You can assign categories to patches and separate them into groups The VG 99 includes a function that allows you to categorize patches 1 From the PLAY screen use the PATCH VALUE e into a number of different groups This is called the CATEGORY dial to select the patch you want to include in a function Specifying the category for each patch makes searching for category patches more convenient The CATEGORY function also features ten user categories you can name however you like 2 Press NAME KEY BPM Using CATEGORY to Call Up Patches 1 Confirm that the Play screen is displayed 2 Press CATEGORY 3 Press F1 NAME The Category screen appears The Name settings screen appears CATEGORY USER 3 Dai Guitar USER Fat LE guaziR
173. OLOR SYNTH PIPE FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS POWER BEND POWER BEND Q SUSTAIN SYNTH SOLO FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS COLOR SUSTAIN SYNTH PWM FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS PWM DEPTH PWM RATE SUSTAIN SYNTH CRYSTAL ATTACK LENGTH MOD TUNE MOD DEPTH ATTACK LEVEL BODY LEVEL SUSTAIN SYNTH ORGAN FEET 16 FEET 8 FEET 4 SUSTAIN SYNTH BRASS FILTER CUTOFF FILTER RESO TOUCH SENS SUSTAIN SYNTH WAVE WAVE SHAPE WAVE SENS WAVE ATTACK WAVE DECAY WAVE LEVEL CUTOFF RESO FILTER TYPE FILTER ATTACK FILTER DECAY FILTER DEPTH MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 A COSM GTR B COSM GTR EQ EQ SW LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN LOW MID FREQ LOW MIDQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN TOTAL GAIN STRING PAN 1st 6th STRING LEVEL 1st 6th MIX LEVEL COSM GUITAR NORMAL PU SW THRSH REL POLY FX COMMON POLY FX SW TYPE POLY FX CH POLY COMP COMP TYPE SUSTAIN ATTACK THRSH REL TONE LEVEL COMP BAL POLY DIST MODE DRIVE HIGH CUT POLY BAL DR
174. ON Turns the DELAY effect on off LEVEL DELAY LEVEL INPUT DELAY gt lt FEEDBACK TIME 1 1800 ms This determines the delay time BPM BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time After setting DELAY TIME to BPM if you tap F2 TAP the BPM value will change to match the timing of your tapping FLAT 55 Hz 800 Hz This sets the frequency at which the low cut filter begins to take effect This lets you cut the low end component be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When Flat is selected the low cut filter will have no effect HIGH CUT High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When Flat is selected the high cut filter will have no effect FEED BACK 0 100 Adjusts the amount of feedback Feedback is returning a delay signal to the input A higher value will increase the number of the
175. PCA de Rc M fc HE 128 AI 4 P ant T t Pb A Hg fa Cd TOMB VD ARUBA PBB A Wi PBDE FM Gu x FREE FEL BR A ED x O BEE Ee o BE x Os x KIR HA EY RIP EH R POLAT RAC BEAT A ATL PI SE HE SJ T11363 2006 TF TE BIER 385 EBL SJ T11363 2006 AY BE OR s For EU Countries c e o e This symbol indicates that in EU countries this product must be collected separately from household waste as defined in each region Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste Dieses Symbol bedeutet dass dieses Produkt in EU L ndern getrennt vom Hausm ll gesammelt werden muss gem den regionalen Bestimmungen Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte d rfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausm ll entsorgt werden Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l Union europ enne ce produit doit tre collect s par ment des ordures m nag res selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays Les produits portant ce symbole
176. PE set to either DUAL S DUAL P or DUAL L R and then begin to play immediately after the patches change you may be unable to attain the intended effect in the first portion of what you perform The stereo effect is cancelled if a monaural effect or COSM amp is connected after a stereo delay effect DELAY Common Parameters Parameter Range Explanation DELAY TIME 1 ms 1800 ms BPM BPM o This determines the delay time When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song Tf due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time When TYPE is set to DUAL S DUAL P or DUAL L R the delay time can be set to any value from 1 to 900 ms After setting DELAY TIME to BPM o if you tap F1 TAP the BPM value will change to match the timing of your tapping FEEDBACK 0 100 This sets the amount of delay sound re turned to the input A higher value will increase the number of the delay repeats Feedback is returning delay signal to the input HIGH CUT High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When it is se
177. R RNG 15 Volume Balance Control Status 3 UPPER BAL 55 15 UPPER RNG 85 3 RELEASE LOWER RNG UPPER RNG Input Level Held Peak Input Level Changes made to the above parameters are indicated in the graph in the settings screen The input level and held peak input level are indicated beneath the graph display Making these settings is easier by actually picking the strings as you watch the meter and adjust the LOWER RNG and UPPER RNG settings In addition you can confirm the volume balance control status with the fader displayed to the right of the graph 149 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MASTER CONTROL ASSIGN Adjust these settings if you would like to use a pedal connected to the VG 99 or an external MIDI device control source to control parameters as you play You can set two parameters as targets to each control source Turn on the COSM guitar COSM amp and effect that contains the parameter you wish to control GK VOL GK Volume Parameter Explanation SW Switch OFF ON This setting switches GK VOL on and off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the maximum value for the range
178. RISE RATE 3 0 100 This determines the time spend for one cycle of the assumed expression pedal FORM 3 This selects one of the three types that determines how the assumed expression pedal should change SAW TRI SIN Some V LINK compatible equipments such as the EDIROL DV 7 allow use only of CH 175 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM V LINK SYSTEM MIDI CH MIDI Channel Parameter Explanation This sets the MIDI receive channel for the V LINK compatible device connected to the VG 99 MIDI A CH MIDI A Channel 1 16ch Sets the MIDI channel for Channel A of the V LINK compatible device MIDI CH MIDI Channel 1 16ch Sets the MIDI channel for Channel B of the V LINK compatible device MIDI C CH MIDI B Channel 1 16ch Specifies the MIDI channel that will control MIDI note plug in The V LINK screen s MIDI CH parameter is a system parameter Whena V LINK compatible device is connected to the VG 99 set this parameter so that the V LINK compatible device s MIDI channel and the MIDI channel used by the VG 99 are not the same The MIDI channels set here are output as System Exclusive messages when the VG 99 s power is turned on and when the V LINK function is switched on Some V LINK compatible equipments such as the EDIROL DV 7PR allow use only of MIDI A CH GATEGORY NAM
179. Roland VG 99 N Czuitar System Owner s Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland VG 99 Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 2 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES 4 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Handbook and Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Roland USER CATEGOR 001 cas GUITAR y V LINK DIRECT PATCH Copyright 2007 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION Roland Website http www roland com USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About the Symbols About Z WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe Z WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly N CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its
180. SM GTR B or NORMAL PU then MAIN amp SUB will be set the next time the VG 99 is powered up If you plan to use COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU remake this setting each time you turn on the power to the VG 99 p 173 Patches not switching 1 Is some screen other than the Play screen shown in the display With the VG 99 you cannot switch patches any screen other than the Play screen Press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen p 19 Is SYSTEM MISC PATCH EXTENT set correctly The range of patches that can be selected is limited by the PATCH EXTENT setting Be sure to set this correctly Unable to control parameters set with Assign as expected 4 Are the effects switched off Check to make sure the effects incorporating the parameters being controlled are on i Is the patch set to anything other than ASSIGNABLE PATCH in SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN Even with the patch s CONTROL ASSIGN setting made the settings made in SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN are given priority To enable the settings in the patch set the controllers under SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN to ASSIGNABLE PATCH Are the MIDI channels matched When carrying out operations using MIDI check to confirm that both devices are set to the same MIDI channel p 58 Are the controller numbers CC matched Check to confirm that the controller numbers you are using
181. STANDRD STANDRD This mode uses the OS s standard USB driver ADVANC This mode uses the special driver contained on the included CD ROM The mode using this driver allows you to record play back and edit audio with high quality sound and stable timing MON CMD Monitor Command This setting determines whether or not the command the Direct Monitor command controlling the Direct Monitor described later setting is enabled DISABL The Direct Monitor command is disabled maintaining the Direct Monitor mode set by the VG 99 ENABLE The Direct Monitor command is enabled al lowing the Direct Monitor mode to be switched from an external device DIRECT MON Direct Monitor Switches the output of the VG 99 sound to the PHONES jack MAIN OUT jacks or SUB OUT jacks OFF Set this to Off if transmitting audio data in ternally through a computer Thru ON The VG 99 sound is output Set this to On when using the VG 99 as a standalone de vice without connecting to a computer only USB IN input sound will be output if this is set to Off This setting cannot be saved It is set to ON when the power is turned on Ifyou are using the special driver you can control DIRECT MON On Off from ASIO 2 0 compatible application 173 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM V LINK V LINK PATCH CLIP Parameter Range Explanati
182. STEM The GK SETTING set here is used globally for the entire VG 99 This is the default fac tory setting PATCH GK SETTINGS are specified for each patch individually Carry out the Write procedure after making changes to the settings in each patch Use this setting when performing with multiple guitars switching the instru ment depending on the patch used SETTING1 10 1 10 This selects the GK SETTING to be set NAME This sets the name for the GK SETTING up to eight characters INSERT Insert a space at the cursor location DELETE Delete a character The characters that fol low get shifted to the left SPACE Input a space at the cursor location AO Switch between uppercase letters numbers and characters lt gt Switch between uppercase letters and low ercase letters 166 SYSTEM Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter Explanation GK PU TYPE GK Pickup Type GK 3 Specifies the GK 3 GK 2A Specifies the GK 2A PIEZO Specifies a piezo pickup GUITAR SCALE 620 660mm This sets the scale length for your guitar ST 648mm LP 628mm GK PU PHASE GK Pickup Phase This sets the phase for the divided pickup and normal pickup The sounds from the divided pickup and normal pickup are mixed so as to enable the proper settings Set this to NORMAL and if the low frequency range is cut set this to INVERS NORMAL The phase is
183. Setting the Volume Balance 1 Press COSM GUITAR COSH GTR COSH GTR SW TYPE OFF m E GTR 2 Setthe COSM GTR SW to ON with F1 or with the F1 knob The sounds from the normal pickup and COSM guitar are not played when COSM GTR SW is set to OFF 3 Press PAGE gt several times to move to the screen for setting the volume balance fa COSM GTR MIX LEVEL e NORMAL su THR H GUITAR Fu 00 28 g 4 Use the 1 and F2 knobs to set the balance between the COSM guitar sound and the normal pickup sound F1 Knob Adjusts the COSM guitar s volume level When POLY FX is set to ON it adjusts the volume level of the signal after it has passed through POLY F2 Knob This adjusts the volume of the normal pickup When the COSM guitar is connected in CHAIN at a point other than the beginning of the effects chain you can adjust the volume of the sounds that have passed though effects from the beginning of the chain up to the point where the guitar is connected 5 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen 33 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting the Point at Which the Normal Pickup Sound 5 Guitar 15 nected When you are using the CHAIN function and the COSM guitar is connected at a point other than the beginning of the chain the normal pickup
184. TER or ASSIGNABLE button to switch on the ribbon controller Available Settings Explanation You can use the T Arm function to control the guitar s pitch and the Freeze function to hold guitar sounds The PITCH effect is applied only to COSM guitars Use this with the COSM guitar volume raised p 33 You can change the tone using the ribbon PITCH FILTER controller The ribbon controller controls the function ASSIGNABLE assigned to it You can assign a variety of functions to the controller cf gt For more on how to set functions and tones please read Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 2 While you play the guitar to produce sound scratch your finger along the ribbon controller The effect is applied to the sound in accordance with the function assigned to the ribbon controller gt To turn off the ribbon controller press the button you pressed in Step 1 again so the indicator goes off The setting switching the ribbon controller on and off is a patch parameter Carry out the Write procedure as required ET A light touch is sufficient when operating the ribbon controller Never press the ribbon controller forcefully or with a hard object or a pointed object Holding Sounds for Extended Periods FREEZE You can press the D BEAM PITCH button to use the FREEZE effect which allows you to hold sounds inde
185. UB The signals are connected at the point where both MAIN OUT and SUB OUT are output Each of the signals from the VG 99 s MAIN OUT and the audio output from the com puter are mixed SUB OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed from the output IN LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume level of the digital audio received via USB from the computer Parameter Range Explanation USB OUT This sets the point internally within the VG 99 from which signals are output via USB to the computer COSM GTR A The output from COSM GUITAR A is output COSM GTR B The output from COSM GUITAR B is output NORMAL PU The normal pickup input is output CHA The output from Channel A is output CHB The output from Channel B is output MIXER DRY The signals that have been mixed with the mixer but before application of DELAY REVERB are output MIXER The signals that have been mixed with the mixer and have DELAY REVERB applied are output MAIN OUT The same signals as those from MAIN OUT are output SUB OUT The same signals as those from SUB OUT are output OUT LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume level of the digital audio output via USB to the computer DRIVER MODE This setting determines which operational mode is used the mode using the special driver contained on the included CD ROM AD VANC or the mode using the OS s Windows Mac OS standard driver
186. USTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador ELSALVADOR TEL 262 0788
187. W MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q Hi gh Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone LOW CUT Low Cut Filter FLAT 55 Hz 800 Hz This lets you cut the low end component be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect HIGH CUT High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When it is set to FLAT the high cut filter is off or has no effect 137 Q E Chapter 9 Parameters Guide SUB DELAY Sub Delay This is a delay with the maximum delay time of 400 ms This effect is useful for making the sound fatter Parameter Explanation Range DELAY TIME 1 ms 400 ms Adjusts the delay time BPM BPM j When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for e
188. When setting OMNI MODE p 170 to OFF be sure to match MIDI CH MIDI Channel p 170 to the external MIDI device s transmit channel beforehand Setting the MIDI Output Control Change Number This sets the Control Change numbers output when the VG 99 s pedals and external pedals or the FC 300 s pedals and external pedals are operated 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt gt to display Page 7 The TX CC screen appears SYSTEM Pil s 8 h gdririrf n nd c MIL Si GE Sz CTL FEDAL 3 Use F2 SEL Y or F3 SEL the F2 or F3 knobs to select the controller you want to set 4 Use F5 or the F5 knob to assign the Control Change number to be transmitted when the controller is adjusted When the controller selected with F2 or F3 is operated the Control Change message selected with F5 is transmitted Control Changes message cannot be output if OFF is selected Bulk Dump With the VG 99 you can use Exclusive messages to set another VG 99 to the same settings or to save effect sound settings to MIDI sequencers and other such devices This transmission of data is referred to as bulk dump Data that can be transmitted is described below Data Transmitted All transmittable data SYSTEM GK SETTING ALL GLOBAL PATCH 001 200 FAVOR
189. a Proco RAT GUV DS This models an Marshall GUV NOR DST This models MXR DISTORTION SOLID DS This is a distortion sound featuring an edge effect MID DS This distortion sound features a boosted midrange STACK A fat sound with an added element of a stack amp s distortion MODERN DS Sound of a large high gain amp POWER DS Sound of Overdrive through a stack amp R MAN This models a ROCKMAN METAL ZONE This is the sound of the BOSS MT 2 HEAVY METAL This creates a heavier distortion sound LEAD Produces a distortion sound with both the smoothness of an overdrive along with a deep distortion LOUD This is a distortion sound with a boosted low end SHARP This is a distortion sound with a boosted high end MECHANICAL This distortion sound boosts the low and high ends yielding a mechanical sounding distortion 605 FUZZ This models a FUZZFACE 120 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide paramen Explanation Range OCT FUZZ This models an ACETONE FUZZ MUFF FUZZ This models an Electro Harmonix Big Muff T CUSTOM Custom OD DS DRIVE 0 120 Adjusts the depth of distortion BOTTOM 50 50 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Turning this to the left counterclock wise produces a sound with the low end cut turning it to the right boosts the low end in the sound TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the o
190. a lighter and crisper tone GAIN SW LOW MIDDLE HIGH Provides for selection from three levels of distortion LOW MIDDLE and HIGH Dis tortion will successively increase for set tings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to MIDDLE So normally set it to MIDDLE SOLO SW OFF ON Pressing SOLO switches the tone to one suitable for solos SOLO LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume level when the Solo switch is ON SP TYPE Speaker Type Select the speaker type OFF This turns off the speaker simulator ORIGNL This is the built in speaker of the amp you selected with PREAMP TYPE 1x8 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 8 inch speaker 1x10 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 10 inch speaker 1X12 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 12 inch speaker 2X12 This is a general open back speaker cabinet with two 12 inch speakers 4X10 This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a large enclosed amp with four 10 inch speakers 4X12 This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a large enclosed amp with four 12 inch speakers 8X12 This is a double stack of two cabinets each with four 12 inch speakers CUSTOM Custom speaker DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 1 The BRIGHT parameter setting is only partially
191. ace cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name VG 99 Type of Equipment Guitar Effector Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA 5 Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 417 3400 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division
192. ach patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song Tf due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time After setting DELAY TIME to BPM o if you tap F1 TAP the BPM value will change to match the timing of your tapping FX Effects NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum picked up by guitar pickups Since it suppresses the noise in synchronization with the envelope of the guitar sound the way in which the guitar sound decays over time it has very little effect on the guitar sound and does not harm the natural character of the sound Please connect the noise suppressor the signal path prior to the reverberation type effect This setup will prevent an natural break of the reverberation type effect Parameter NS SW Noise Suppressor Switch Explanation FEEDBACK 0 100 Adjusts the volume that is returned to the input Feedback refers to returning the delayed signal back into the input of the delay High er settings will result in more delay repeats EFFECT LEVEL OFF ON Turns the NS effect on off THRSH Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is
193. ade otherwise the operations described in this manual are carried out with the Play screen displayed When the power to the VG 99 is turned on the patch selected at the time the power was last turned off is called up The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual 2 Turnon the power to the guitar amp or mixer Raise volume levels only after turning on the power to all the devices Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds About the Play Screen The VG 99 has a variety of Play screen variations each providing different information about the current state of the VG 99 You can switch the information shown in the Play screen by pressing PAGE 4 gt Screen 1 The first nine characters of the patch name are displayed in large type also shown are icons for the guitars and amps in both channels CATEGORY V Guitar 5 2 sixteen characters of the patch name are displayed KEY C TEMFO 128 LEVEL 168 GK SETTING GE SET A ATRIA CLA ST GTRIET LF Screen 3 The effects used as well as their connection sequence CHAIN in both channels are indicated Screen 4 The screen shows level meters for the GK IN st
194. ameters GK SETTING Settings content for GK SETTING GLOBAL GLOBAL function settings PATCH Settings for patch numbers 001 200 FAVORITE SETTING Settings content in FAVORITE SETTINGS 01 10 for all effects 171 gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM Parameter Explanation Range Parameter D OUT Digital Out Explanation Range This switches the signals output from DIGITAL OUT OUTPUT MODE COSM GTR A This outputs the sounds from COSM GTR SYSTEM The values set in the SYSTEM parameters fe MAIN OUT MAIN LEVEL SUB OUT SUB COSM B This outputs the sounds from COSM GTR B LEVEL D OUT and D OUT LEVEL are en NORMAL PU This outputs the sounds from the normal abled pickup PATCH The values set in MAIN OUT MAIN LEV CHA This outputs Channel A EL SUB OUT SUB LEVEL D OUT D OUT This output also reflects the mixer s MIX LEVEL for each patch are enabled SW PAN LEVEL and A B BAL settings MAIN OUT CHB This outputs Channel B This output also reflects the mixer s MIX Th tches th ls output to MAIN OUT a poe SW PAN LEVEL A B BAL settings is outputs Channel A 5 S The mixer s MIX SW PAN LEVEL and A 12422 BAL also reflected here This outputs Channel
195. anation CONTRAST 1 50 Setting up the VG 99 in certain positions may make the display difficult to read If this occurs adjust the display contrast legi bility DIRECT PATCH Parameter Explanation GK SETTING Parameter Explanation Range GK CONNCT GK Connect AUTO This automatically determines the GK con nection and switches the internal settings When the GK connection is in use the GUI TAR INPUT connection is disabled OFF Use this setting if you normally use the con nection for GUITAR INPUT ON Use this setting if you are normally using a GK connection GK FUNC GK Function GK VOL GK Volume DIRECT PATCH DIR PATCH 1 5 This sets the desired DIRECT PATCH 1 DIRECT PATCH 5 This selects the function assigned to GK VOL cf gt For more on the functions assigned refer to the GK VOL column in Parameters That Be Assigned to Separate Controllers p 168 GK S1 S2 GK S1 S2 Switch This selects the functions assigned to GK S1 S2 cf gt For more on the functions assigned refer to the GK S1 52 column in Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Separate Controllers p 168 SET MODE This setting allows you to select whether one GK SETTING is used globally for the entire VG 99 or if different GK SETTINGS are speci fied for each patch individually SY
196. at A4 the note played with the A key at the middle of the piano keyboard played by the instrument e g piano used as the reference for tuning for performances Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds A F6 MUTE OFF MUTE ON This setting determines whether sounds from the output jacks are output or not while tuning is in progress TUNER Explanation MUTE OFF Sounds are output during tuning Sounds are not output during tuning MUTE ON With the factory settings this is set to MUTE ON 4 Play a single note open on the string being 5 tuned Tune the string until the name of the string is shown in the display When you choose the MULTI MODE TUNER iu 7 Keep checking the screen tuning until the center indicator lights up Repeat Steps 3 5 to tune all the strings When tuning a guitar equipped with a tremolo arm you may find that when one string is in tune other strings may not be If this occurs first tune the string until its name is indicated in the display then continue to fine tune each string a number times until the tuning is correct When you have finished tuning press TUNER or EXIT This completes the preparations for playing the instrument Now try playing some sounds Switching Tones Patch What is a patch The VG 99 can store 400 configurations of tone related settings including the COSM guitar COSM amp and effects Each one of these
197. ation JB Range pats ihr EQ Equalizer Parameter E Eq Range Explanation A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be REAR VOL Rear Volume fore it is output 0 100 Sets the volume of the rear pickup With a EQ SW Equalizer Switch setting of 0 there will be no sound FRONT VOL F t Vol OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off ront Volume TOTAL GAIN 0 100 Sets the volume of the front pickup With a setting of 0 there will be no sound 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer MASTER VOL Master Volume LOW GAIN 0 100 Sets the overall bass volume level With a Adjusts the low frequency range tone setting of 0 there will be no sound HIGH GAIN TONE 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone 0 100 Adjusts the tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range PB that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN Parameter LOW MID Q Low Middle Q Range 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the VOL Volume EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there z z ee LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain TONE 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range t 0 100 Adjusts the tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH M
198. ay be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening If you do so please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid
199. b as follows Major C F g E A D Minor Am Dm Gm Cm Fm B m Major G D A E B FF Minor Em Bm Ffm D m BPM Parameter Range BPM 40 250 Explanation Adjust the BPM value for each patch Control with the Master BPM You can tap input the BPM with F1 AMP CONTROL Parameter Explanation Range CTL1 CTL2 OFF ON This setting switches the FC 300 s AMP CTL 1 AMP CTL 2 parameters on and off TX PC Transmit Program Change Parameter Range Explanation You can assign whatever Program Change numbers you want to patches This setting is enabled when the SYSTEM MIDI TX PC MAP is set to PROG p 171 BANK MSB OFF 1 127 This sets the Bank Select MSB to be output BANK LSB OFF 1 127 This sets the Bank Select LSB to be output PC Program Change 1 128 This sets the Program Change to be output PATCH LEVEL Parameter Explanation Range PATCH LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume the patch This parameter is the same as PATCH LEVEL 146 in MIXER 163 o o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide GUITAR TO MIDI GUITAR TO MIDI Parameter
200. basic channel TX PC STRING 1 6 This sets the Program Change messages for each string that are out put when the VG 99 s patches are switched BANK MSB OFF 1 127 This sets the Bank Select MSB BANK LSB OFF 1 127 This sets the Bank Select LSB Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter Range Explanation PC Program Change OFF 1 128 This sets the Program Number SYSTEM These parameters are applied to the entire VG 99 in the GUITAR TO MIDI function Parameter Explanation Range HOLD CTL Hold Control This setting determines the controller used for the HOLD function GK 51 52 GK 3 DOWN S1 UP S2 switch CTL1 2 Control button1 2 CTL3 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack FC 300 CTL1 2 FC 300 control pedal1 2 FC 300 CTL3 8 FC 300 external footswitch3 8 BEND THIN OFF ON Setting this to ON thins out the Pitch Bend messages and reduces the volume of MIDI data BASIC CH Basic Channel 1 11 This sets the MIDI transmit channel used for the GUITAR TO MIDI function PC MASK Program Change Mask OFF ON When set to ON the Bank Select messages and Program Change messages used for the GUITAR TO MIDI function are not trans mitted when patches are changed 165 gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM LCD CONTRAST Parameter Expl
201. bject the ethernet cable to stress or physical shock Carefully connect the RRC2 cable all the way in until it is firmly connected to the RRC2 IN connector When outputting in mono connect cable only to the MAIN OUT L MONO jack You cannot use COSM GUITAR or POLY FX with signals input via GUITAR IN The GT PRO s internal FX COSM AMP MIXER and other settings be used fully in two channels When connecting an expression pedal to the EXP PEDAL jack use the pedal with the minimum level at the MIN position When connecting an FS 6 footswitch optional to the CTL3 4 jack set the MODE switch and POLARITY switch as shown below B A POLARITY MODE MODE POLARITY FS 5U FS 5L FS 5U FS 5L MOMENTARY LATCH MOMENTARY LATCH BOSS FS 6 When connecting an FS 5U footswitch optional to the CTL3 4 jack set the POLARITY switch as shown below BOSS FS 5U 17 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds You can connect two FS 5Us using the special Roland PCS 31 connection cable optional When an FS 6 is connected to the CTL3 4 jack with an optional connection cable stereo 1 4 phone stereo 1 4 phone pedal switch B operates according to the CONTROL 3 settings and pedal switch A operates according to the CONTROL 4 settings To CTL3 4 jack To CTL3 4 jack To CTL3 4 jack PCS 31 cable
202. ch speaker 1x10 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 10 inch speaker 1X12 This is a compact open back speaker cabinet with one 12 inch speaker 2X12 This is a general open back speaker cabinet with two 12 inch speakers 4X10 This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a large enclosed amp with four 10 inch speakers 4X12 This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a large enclosed amp with four 12 inch speakers 8X12 This is a double stack of two cabinets each with four 12 inch speakers CUSTOM Custom speaker DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound MIC TYPE This setting selects the simulated mic type DYN57 This is the sound of the SHURE SM 57 General dynamic mic used for instruments and vocals Optimal for use in miking guitar amps DYN421 This is the sound of the SENNHEISER MD 421 Dynamic mic with extended low end CND451 This is the sound of the AKG C451B Small condenser mic for use with instru ments CND87 This is the sound of the NEUMANN U87 Condenser mic with flat response FLAT Simulates a mic with perfectly flat response Produces a sonic image close to that of lis tening to the sound directly from the speak ers on site MIC DIS Mic Distance Simulates the distance between the mic and speaker Off MIC This setting points the mic away from the speaker On MIC Provides conditions whereby the mic
203. ck RANGE HIGH 50 50 Selects the tone produced when the pedal is forward PRESENCE 50 50 Adjusts the tonal quality of the wah effect 1 Setting available when TYPE is set to CUSTOM Chapter 9 Parameters Guide FX Effects EQ Equalizer This adjusts the tone as a sub equalizer A parametric type is adopted for the high middle and low middle range Parameter Explanation EQ SW Equalizer Switch OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 20 20dB Adjusts the overall volume level of the equalizer LOW GAIN 20 20dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 20 20dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q DELAY This effect adds delayed sound to the direct sound giving more body to the sound or for creating special effects Parameter Explanation DELAY SW OFF ON Turns the DELAY effect on off DELAY TYPE Selects the type of delay SINGLE This is a simple monaural delay PAN This delay is specifically for stereo output This allows you to obtain the tap delay effect that divides the delay time then deliver them to L and R channels TAP TIME OUTPUT L EFFECT LEVEL DELAY TIME INPUT OUTPUT R
204. creased it becomes easier to produce high volume sounds even with weaker picking This allows you to play with consistent vol ume whether you tap the strings or use rough picking In general use higher setting numbers for softer picking fingerpicking or tapping NO DYNA In this mode sounds are played at a fixed volume regardless of the picking strength STRUM This suppresses the output of sounds from weaker picking This setting allows you to prevent undes ired sounds produced when playing rhythm or due to incidental contact with strings from incorrect picking 164 Parameter Range Explanation CHROMATIC This sets the VG 99 so that if you play bends or slides the unit will not send pitch bend message but instead will play the notes in half steps OFF Pitches are output continuously TYPE1 When the pitch changes this setting applies the results of the pitch change information without stopping the note that is playing This produces a unique effect whereby there is no attack sound when the pitches change similar to slurring on a clarinet or a saxophone TYPE2 When the pitch changes the VG 99 retrig gers replays the sound at the changed pitch producing pitch changes only at the semitone increments As a result the attack of the new note starts at the current volume of the string not the original volume As with CHROMATIC TYPE 2 sounds are retriggered a
205. cut filter is off or has no effect DELAY1 LEVEL 0 120 Adjusts the volume of the Delay1 DELAY2 TIME 1 ms 900 ms This determines the delay time of the BPM BPM o Delay2 DELAY2 FEEDBACK 0 100 Adjusts the amount of feedback of the Delay2 DELAY2 FEEDBACK Delay 2 High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter of the Delay2 begins to take effect When it is set to FLAT the high cut filter is off or has no effect DELAY2 LEVEL 0 120 Adjusts the volume of the Delay2 124 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide WARP Using the HOLD Hold Delay Parameter Expl 5 xplanation Recording and playback of performances and other operations are carried out with pedals while Hold is in effect Connect external pedals WARP SW footswitches or an FC 300 OFF ON Turns the WARP effect on off This parameter is assigned to the following functions to the connected external pedals footswitch CTL 1 2 CTL 3 4 and or footswitches or FC 300 CTL pedals _ a e ll TARGET PARAMETER SW MODE RISE TIME LL TL3 etc A FX or B FX 0 100 Adjusts how rapidly the warped delay DELAY HOLD LATCH sound rises REC FEEDBACK DEPTH CTL4 etc A FX or B FX 0 100 Adjusts the feedback level of the warped de DELAY HOLD lay sound STOP LEV
206. d Confirm operation of the controller by testing it onstage under the actual illumination Ifthe set range is too narrow or if the positioning is not suitable the message OUT OF RANGE SET AGAIN appears To keep this message from appearing change the range or position and recalibrate The controller may not function properly with spot lights or other such lighting shining directly on it Chapter 8 Other Functions Disabling the D Beam DISABLE You can disable the D Beam controller for the entire device If you are using the VG 99 rack mounted or otherwise not using the D Beam controller we recommend disabling the D Beam controller by setting D BEAM DISAB to OFF 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 3 Press F5 CALIB 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 The D BEAM CALIB screen appears SYSTEM 5 Switch the controller on or off with F6 OFF ON Available Settings Explanation OFF The D Beam is enabled The D Beam is disabled Pressing the D BEAM PITCH FILTER or ASSIGNABLE button to switch the D Beam controller on will have no effect ON 6 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen The DISABLE setting is a system parameter so the Write procedure is not required Controlling Sounds by Hand Motion or the Guitar Neck D Beam Controller The D Beam controller allows you to change the sounds played by moving
207. d Roland s VG 99 Their marks are used solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by Roland s VG 99 By making settings for the various elements that make up the tone of a guitar you can create a wide variety of sounds You can set actual guitar parameters such as pickup body and the pitch of each string Parameter Explanation COSM GTR SW COSM Guitar Switch OFF ON Turns the COSM guitar on off MODLNG TYPE E GTR Select the electric guitar type AC Select the acoustic guitar type BASS Select the bass guitar type SYNTH Select the synthesizer sound type GTR TYPE AC TYPE BASS TYPE SYNTH refer to Type List Select the COSM guitar from each modeling type The parameters that can be set will depend on the type For details on the parameters refer to the corresponding item Modeling Type List E GTR Electric Guitar p 103 Parameter Explanation CLA ST Classic ST The sound of a Fender Stratocaster Simulates the installation of three single coil pickups passive type MOD ST Modern ST The sound of a Stratocaster type guitar Simulates the installation of the EMG s three single coil pickups active type TE Telecaster The sound of a Fender Telecaster A particular characteristic of the sound is the boosted high end when the volume is turned down LP Les Paul The sound of a
208. d in the gradual fading of the retriggered sound TYPE3 As with TYPE 2 sounds are retriggered at the changed pitch expressing the pitch changes only in semitones However instead of reflecting the attenuation of the string vibration the retriggered sound is the same as that when the string was initially played Chapter 6 Using Selecting How the Hold Functions HOLD TYPE This selects the Hold function type when the controller set with the HOLD CTL parameter p 65 is adjusted 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 GTR TO MIDI PAA FLAY CHRO HOLD FEEL MATIC TYFE FEEL1 OFF HOLD1 H amp 8 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select MONO 4 Adjust the setting with F4 SELECT or the F4 knob HOLD1 The Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller If the Hold function remains on as you continue to play the strings each successive Note On message is held and when a Note message is already being played from the same string the previous Note message is cancelled and the next Note On message is held This allows you to prevent any interruption in the sounds even sounds from releasing the strings over the frets e HOLD2 The Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller However subsequent Note On messages a
209. d when attaching and removing the units Chapter 8 Other Functions Using the VG 99 Mounted in a Rack By employing the separately available RAD 99 rack mount adaptor you can use the VG 99 in a rack mounted configuration 1 Turnthe VG 99 over and remove the screws from the bottom panel 2 Attach the RAD 99 as shown in the figure using the screws removed in Step 1 or the knob nuts included with the kit 3 Mount the VG 99 in the rack Use screws in four places to securely affix the unit to the rack Use screws included with the rack For instructions how to assemble the RAD 99 adjust the angle of attachment refer to the RAD 99 Setting Manual Use the screws M5 x 10 included with the VG 99 to attach the RAD 99 Use of other screws may damage the device internally or cause the unit to be inadequately secured When turning the unit over place some newspapers magazines or other such material under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons dials and other controls Also try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls are damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over When removing the screws be sure to keep them out of the reach of children to prevent smaller children from accidentally swallowing them Take care not to allow hands and fingers
210. delay repeats DENS 0 10 Adjusts the density of the reverb sound LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the reverb sound HIGH CUT High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 0 kHz FLAT This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take effect This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When it is set to FLAT the high cut filter is off or has no effect LEVEL 0 120 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 148 MIXER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide DYNAMIC This function allows you use your picking dynamics to control the volume of the mix of the two channels The volume and balance of the channels change according to the dynamics each time you pick the strings You can set the point at which the volume changes in the settings screen as you check the dynamics level shown by the meter The A B BAL setting is disabled when DYNAMIC is switched on Parameter Range DYNA SW OFF ON TYPE This sets the DYNAMIC type This setting determines the channel for which the volume is con trolled with the picking dynamics Explanation This setting switches DYNAMIC on and off DYNA A Channel A s volume level is controlled The volume in Channel B is fixed DYNA Channel B s volume level is controlled The volume in Channel A is fixed DYNA BAL The volume levels of both Channel A and
211. duces the original Two complete sound creation systems The VG 99 features two separate guitar and COSM amp systems You can use two different types of modeled guitars simultaneously and create different amp sounds to use with each guitar What s more the VG 99 comes equipped with two effects systems featuring a huge selection of BOSS effects including COSM effects This all enables you to achieve the perfect processing for each individual guitar Equipped with D Beam ribbon and other new realtime controllers The VG 99 now enables new and heretofore unimaginable forms of musical expression including new ways of using the guitar s neck and your hands Of course you can still connect expression pedals and control switches as well just as with previous V Guitar systems Console style accommodates a variety of usage environments The VG 99 can be set up in a number of different ways to suit the needs of the user as a desktop unit for recording or when using computer input attached to its stand optional and set up right by the performer or placed in a rack with the optional rack mount adaptor Combine with the FC 300 to create the perfect live system Connecting a Roland FC 300 MIDI Foot Controller optional to the VG 99 allows you to switch tones and carry out other tasks using the FC 300 s multiple foot pedals for easy hands free operation These units also feature an RRC2 connector allowing you to connect the VG
212. e knob to set the Device ID 1 32 SYNC CLOCK You can synchronize the VG 99 to the MIDI Clock tempo transmitted from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 3 Use F6 SELECT or the F6 knob to select the MIDI Clock to use as the tempo reference cf gt For detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to Syncing to the MIDI CLOCK from an External Device p 64 MIDI ROUTING Set the VG 99 s control signal path The VG 99 features three types of connectors for data input and output the MIDI connectors IN OUT a USB connector and the RRC2 IN connector When connecting the VG 99 to devices other than the FC 300 you need to consider the routing of the control signals Check the display as you set the necessary connections You can make the settings for MIDI IN and OUT on Page 2 for the USB connector on Page 3 and for the RRC2 IN connector on Page 4 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Pages 2 4 EXAM MIDI C ROUTING MIDI IH zc HIDI OUT MAIN USBIHMIDIJ MAIN 4 CEFTA HAIN MATH 3 Set the connections with F1 F3 or the F1 F3 knobs 59 Chapter 6 U
213. e and achieve various other tunings BEND You can use a pedal to have pitches change from the current tuning to the set tuning in a continuous transition just as with a string bender or pedal steel guitar 12 STRING This changes the sound of a regular six string guitar to that of a twelve string guitar This function also gives you the freedom to set the pitch and volume of each secondary string independently enabling you to create 12 string guitar models with entirely original tunings DETUNE This allows you to set a subtle shift in the pitch of each individual string HARMONY This analyzes the pitch of each string then converts the pitches into harmonies matched to the key These functions can be set for each of the two COSM guitars A and B individually meaning you can now play six string and twelve string guitars simultaneously produce twin twin leads by creating harmonies on your own achieve fat unison sounds and come up with sounds never before possible all with a single VG 99 Additionally the VG 99 includes an AB LINK function which allows you to set the TUNING and BEND for the two COSM guitars A and B simultaneously for even quicker settings The pitches output with GUITAR TO MIDI the MIDI Note messages change according to the Channel A Alternate Tuning settings TUNING BEND HARMO The Channel B Alternate Tuning settings have no bearing on these output pitches Ifthe pitch output with GUITAR TO MID
214. e value produces more of a sense of the guitar body in the sound Lower the value in con ditions where feedback is prone to occur The body resonance is monophonic This means that if this Body parameter is set to 100 the panning of each string will have less effect To produce the sound of a solid body set ATTACK and BODY to 0 LOW CUT THRU 55 800Hz Specifies the cutoff frequency of the low cut filter for the bypass sound LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation The resonation increases as the value is raised TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone of the body The standard value is 0 raising the value boosts the high range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the body With a set ting of 0 there will be no sound 0 100 Adjusts the volume With a setting of 0 there will be no sound VARI Parameter Range Explanation PU TYPE Pickup Type PIEZO Piezo pickup MIC A hypothetical mic ideal for picking up the sound of an acoustic guitar BODY TYPE PU TONE Pickup Tone Selects the type of acoustic body 50 50 Adjusts the tone PU LEVEL Pickup Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume With a setting of 0 there will be no sound FLAT The body of an acoustic guitar with a flat top and back ROUND The body of a flat top acoustic guitar with a round back made of resin f HOLE An f hole body with a
215. e width of the finger used to activate the controller If this occurs use the procedure below to readjust the range 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 PEREAT CATEGORY NAME MISC FLIE Cf AECOER W LINK PCATGRY 3 Press F5 CALIB OQUTFLIT HIZzCc 4 Press PAGE gt go to Page 2 The RIBBON screen appears 5 Setthe responsive range as you actually operate the ribbon controller First while holding your finger against the near end of the ribbon controller press F1 SetMIN Next hold your finger against the far end and press F4 SetMAX Er If the message OUT OF RANGE SET AGAIN is displayed carry out the calibration process once more If the message continues to appear even after the calibration is correctly performed it may indicate damage or malfunction Consult your Roland dealer or contact Roland Service 6 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen The CALIBRATION setting is a system parameter so the Write procedure is not required Chapter 8 Other Functions Controlling the Sounds with the Movement of Your Fingertip Ribbon Controller The ribbon controller allows you to change sounds by scratching or tracing your finger along the ribbon You can apply various effects to the sound by changing the functions assigned to this controller 1 Press the RIBBON CONTROLLER PITCH FIL
216. e COSM GUITAR NYLON Parameter Explanation 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation Raising the val ue produces more of a sense of the guitar body in the sound Lower the value in condi tions where feedback is prone to occur The body resonance is monophonic This means that if this Body parameter is set to 100 the panning of each string will have less effect ATTACK 0 100 Specifies the strength of the attack when you pluck the string strongly As this setting is increased the attack will be sharper and the sound will be crisper TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone of the body The standard value is 0 raising the value boosts the high range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the body With a set ting of 0 there will be no sound SITAR Explanation PU Pickup FRONT Use the front pickup R F Use both front and rear pickups REAR Use the rear pickup PIEZO Piezo pickup SENS Sensitivity 0 100 Adjusts the input sensitivity BODY 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation Raising the value produces more of a sense of the guitar body in the sound Lower the value in con ditions where feedback is prone to occur COLOR 0 100 Adjusts the overall tone quality of the sitar DECAY 0 100 Adjusts the time it takes following the attack for the tone to change BUZZ 0 100 Adjusts the amount of characte
217. e Oe era nee nae deed 90 Naming User Categories CATEGORY 2 44 4 0 1010 91 Storing Your Preferred Settings Individually FAVORITE SETTINGS sssseessees 91 Whatare Favorite inais eneeier e adi epit dai tinens 91 Calling Up Favorite Settings eene eth testet teo 92 Changing Tone Settings 4 1 0 tt nte tenente tenens 92 Saving Changed sedere rit hon eigene EM au bre cede e VEEE E 93 Naming Favorite Settings FAVORITE NAMIE sese nne 94 Searching for Patches That Use the Same Favorite Settings sss 94 Activating the Virtual Expression Pedal at the Start of Operations Internal Pedal System 95 Internal Pedal eee e teet item ette men ee de de tere ege ies 95 Wave Pedal ot RAEE e ERE aetate 95 Controlling Video Images with Your Guitar V LINK sss 96 Whatis V LINK dra abc oco 96 Connecting the V LINK Device niare ee rte eripe een ed peccet petens 96 Switching V LINK On and Off nennen tenentes 96 Seting V EINK hd aute deeem 97 Using the VG 99 ona Stand ee E ertet p eee e ee te ip a ete tiet 98 Using the VG 99 Mounted in a Rack sse eene entente nenne 99 Restoring
218. e extremes e g direct CS sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating d j SD uct on top of heat generating equipment or 5 Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are Subject to high levels of vibration This unit should be used only with a rack mount adaptor RAD 99 or stand PDS 10 that is recommended by Roland 98 When using the unit with a stand PDS 10 recom mended by Roland the stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock Connect only the specified device FC 300 to the RRC2 IN connector which provide a supply of power the supplied power cord must not be used with Use only the attached power supply cord Also Q any other device Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can S damage the cord producing sev
219. e not output from the USB connec tor MAIN Signals received at MIDI IN are transmitted to the VG 99 s internal section 170 MAIN MIDI signals from the VG 99 are output USB MIDI signals received via USB are output MIDI MIDI signals received at MIDI IN are output from the RRC2 connector thru When oth er signals also are set to be output simulta neously from the RRC2 connector the signals are mixed and then output together merge SYSTEM Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter Range Explanation PC Program Change PC OUT Program Change Out OFF ON This setting determines whether or not Pro gram Change messages are output when the VG 99 s patches are switched Program Change messages are output when this is set to ON TX PC MAP TX Program Change Map This setting determines the sequence of Program Change messages output when the VG 99 s patches are changed FIX Regardless of the patch settings Program Change messages predetermined for each patch number are output PROG The Program Change messages pro grammed in each patch are output RX PC MAP RX Program Change Map You can select whether to use a fixed or freely set correspondence be tween program numbers received and the patches switched to when the VG 99 s patches are switched by Program Change messages transmitted by an external MIDI device FIX The VG 99
220. e played with greater force The harmonic compo nents become more prominent as the value is raised To make adjustment easier set FILTER CUTOFF to 100 and FILTER RESO and TOUCH SENS to 0 then gradually increase the FILTER RESO setting as you play the guitar SUSTAIN 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain 113 gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM GUITAR PWM ORGAN Parameter Explanation i Range planatio Range Explanation FILTER CUTOFF FEET 16 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the 0 100 This is a Long Tone one octave lower than brightness hardness of the sound The sound the guitar gets brighter harder as the value is raised FEET 8 FILTER RESO Filter Resonance 0 100 This is a Long Tone at the same pitch as the guitar 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the FEET 4 sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen 0 100 This isa Long Tone one octave higher than cy are boosted making the sound more dis the guitar tinctive and unique SUSTAIN TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low 0 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is level signals are boosted Larger values will shifted according to the picking
221. e the software is not set to thru for audio signals If the USB IN parameter is set to COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU the setting automatically changes to MAIN amp SUB the next time the VG 99 is powered up If you plan to use COSM GTR A COSM GTR B or NORMAL PU make the setting each time you turn on the power to the VG 99 OFF The signals are not connected at any point COSM GTR A The signals are connected at the point where the COSM GUITAR A is output The audio output from the computer in stead of the COSM guitar sounds played by the connected guitar is input to the effects POLY FX are not applied COSM GTR B The signals are connected at the point where the COSM GUITAR B is output The audio output from the computer in stead of the COSM guitar sounds played by the connected guitar is input to the effects POLY FX are not applied NORMAL PU The signals are connected at the normal pickup input The audio output from the computer in stead of the normal sounds played by the connected guitar is input to the effects MAIN OUT The signals are connected at the point where MAIN OUT is output The signals from the VG 99 s MAIN OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed and output SUB OUT The signals are connected at the point where SUB OUT is output The signals from the VG 99 s SUB OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed and output MAIN amp S
222. e width Mod ulation This Instrument represents the pulse width modulation PWM of an analog synthesizer The pulse width of the wave form produced by the vibrating string is varied cyclically to create a characteristic sound CRYSTL This is an Instrument providing a metallic luster ORGAN This is a Long Tone Instrument suitable for playing solo parts or slow songs Like an organ you should balance out the volume levels for the three parameters FEET 16 8 4 to create just the sound you re after BRASS This instrument detects the pitch of the electric guitar and creates a synthesizer sound WAVE Wave Synth This algorithm creates synth sounds by directly processing the string signal from the Divided pickup It allows a nat ural feeling of playability 102 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide e e E GTR Electric Guitar VARI Setting the parameter of electric guitar Parameter Explanation CLA ST MOD ST PU SEL Pickup Select REAR Use the rear pickup Explanation R F Use both rear and front pickups angg FRONT Use the front pickup PU SEL Pickup Select VOL Volume REAR Use the rear pickup 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there R C Use both center and rear pickups wi
223. ed tempo set the corresponding effect parameter to BPM BPM e f TERM BPM stands for beats per minute and represents the number of quarter notes played in one minute Lef gt If you want to use the MIDI SYNC function the SYNC CLOCK parameter must be set to AUTO USB AUTO MIDI or AUTO RRC2 For detailed information refer to Syncing to the MIDI CLOCK from an External Device p 64 To use Tap Input Press F5 TAP at least two times at quarter note intervals of the desired tempo The tempo will be calculated automatically and set to the interval at which you pressed the button 4 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Setting the Key 1 Press NAME KEY BPN 2 Press F2 KEY HANMER EY lt 5 a a L 3 Setthe song s key with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob The Alternate Tuning HARMONY and FX MOD 1 2 HARMONIST functions operate in accordance with the key set here 4 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Mixing the Normal Pickup Sound Creating Sounds Combining the Normal and GK Inputs It is possible to combine the sound of the COSM guitars and the normal guitar pickups at the same time
224. egardless of the OUTPUT LEVEL knob setting PITCH FILTER You can adjust the volume level by assigning this function to the expression pedal or GK 3 GK volume control For details see Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN 82 Setting the Device Amp Connected to MAIN OUT Output Select Use this procedure to set the type of device connected to the MAIN OUT jacks us RIBBON CONTROLLER QU PITCH FILTER om E DELAY REVERB DYNAMIC system CONTROL ASSIGN E GLOBAL NAME KEY BP ER 1 Press GLOBAL The Global screen is displayed GLOBAL SETTING LINE PHONES 1 GLOBAL 2 SELECT 2 Press lt 4 to go to Page 1 3 Press F4 SELECT or turn the F4 knob to set the type of device to be connected to the MAIN OUT jacks Value Explanation 120 Use this setting when connecting to Roland s JC 120 guitar amp Use this setting when connecting to a small SMALL AMP guitar amp Use this setting when connecting to the guitar in put of a combo amp other than the JC 120 guitar amp where the amp and speaker or speakers are COMBO AMP combined in a single unit Depending on your guitar amp you may be able to obtain good results with the JC 120 setting Use this setting when connecting to the guitar input of a stack type guitar amp where the amp and speaker or speakers are
225. encer K Siia message SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE to zem RECEIVING is displayed while the data is being received Once the reception is complete you re returned to the screen 3 Use F2 SEL or F3 SEL to select the data you were m prior to reception In this state the VG 99 can then receive further data 4 Press F1 CHECK If the message MIDI BUFFER FULL appears check the Only the types of data with a check mark are transmitted you want to transmit connections and reduce the tempo of the transmitting MIDI device When selecting PATCH FROM TO you can use the PATCH VALUE dial to specify the range of patch numbers to be transmitted pi Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as needed Press F6 DUMP Transmission begins Once the transmission is complete you re returned to the screen you were in prior to transmission You can cancel the procedure in progress by pressing EXIT 63 Chapter 6 Using MIDI Syncing to the MIDI CLOCK from an External Device 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 SYSTEM adlur t OUR MIDI OHHI DEVICE CH MODE Tch 1 2 OFF On 3 Use F6 SELECT or the F6 knob to select the synchronizing signal This specifies the setting to be stored as the SYNC CLOCK setting INTERNAL The VG 99 operates independe
226. eo 1 4 phone type DIGITAL OUT jack Coaxial type conforms to IEC60958 3 EXP PEDAL jack 1 4 TRS phone type CTL 34 jack 1 4 TRS phone type USB connector B type RRC2 IN connector RJ45 type MIDI connectors x 2 IN OUT 5 pin DIN type DC IN jack Power Supply AC Adaptor PSB 1U Current Draw 13A Chapter 10 Appendices Dimensions 384 0 W x 218 0 D x 93 5 H mm VG 99 Softwa re System 15 1 8 W x 8 5 8 D x 3 11 16 H inches Requirements EIA 5U rack mount type optional rack mount adaptor RAD 99 Weight For Windows 2 1 kg 4165 11 oz excluding AC Adaptor ti Syst perating System Accessories Microsoft Windows Owner s Manual e Microsoft Windows Vista GK cable 3 m CPU Clock Celeron Intel compatible processor 1 GHz or VG 99 Software CD ROM AC adaptor PSB 1U RAM Knob Bolt x 4 e 512 MBytes or more Roland Service information sheet Free space required on hard disk Options e 190 MBytes or more Divided Pickup GK 3 A 2 MIDI Foot Controller 300 Display resolution Color depth Footswitch BOSS FS 5U 6 1024 768 or higher 65 536 colors 16 bit High Color or Expression Pedal EV 5 BOSS FV 500L 500H SE GK Cable GKC 10 5 3 Unit Selector US 20 For Mac OS GK Parallel Box GKP 4 Rack Mount Adaptor RAD 99 Operating System Pad Stand PDS 10 e MacOSX 10 4 3 or later Footswitch Cable PCS 31 CPU Clock 0 0 775 V rms PowerPC G4 G5 1 GHz or
227. er objects such as guitars This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the partic ulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Unsuitable places for connection Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion Telephone line ground or lightning rod may be dangerous in the event of lightning When connection cables with resistors are used the volume level of equipment connected to the GUITAR INPUT may be low If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors Never connect anything other than the FC 300 s RRC2 OUT connector to the VG 99 s RRC2 IN connector Connecting to a LAN or other devices that use modular jacks of the same size and shape RJ45 may result in damage to the VG 99 and or the connected device J fusing a commercially available ethernet cable as RRC2 connecting cable be sure that the cable meets the following specifications e Category 5 Cat5 or above Maximum length of 15 meters Cable designed for straight through connections Crossover cables cannot be used Do not su
228. er tohto produktu vykon va oddelene od domov ho odpadu pod a nariaden platn ch v konkr tnej krajine Produkty s t mto symbolom sa nesm vyhadzova spolu s domov m odpadom See s mbol n itab et EL i maades tuleb see toode olempr gist eraldi koguda nii nagu on igas piirkonnas m ratletud Selle s mboliga m rgitud tooteid ei tohi ra visata koos olmepr giga is simbolis rodo kad ES alyse is produktas turi b ti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitini atliek kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione Siuo simboliu pa enklinti produktai neturi b ti i metami kartu su buitin mis atliekomis is simbols nor da ka ES valst s o produktu j iev c atsevi i no m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem k noteikts katr regiona Produktus ar o simbolu nedr kst izmest kop ar m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem Ta simbol ozna uje da je treba proizvod v dr avah EU zbirati lo eno od gospodinjskih odpadkov tako kot je dolo eno v vsaki regiji Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki avt u otis to ovyxexoui vo GvAA yevau VIOAOLMA owmax oe TOV p govv to ovyxexoui vo O uPOAO VA ova
229. ered elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be S capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist material coins pins or liquids of any kind Do not allow any objects e g flammable S water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or f smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do no
230. erent Guitar Settings in Each Patch SET MODE sse 46 Determining the Function of the GK Volume Control and DOWN SI UP S2 Switches VE Ren A a TAE EE aa E Aaaa EE a 46 Adjusting Overall Tone According to the Environment GLOBAL OUTPUT SELECT 46 Selecting the SetHnes dae ntes Ead 46 Naming the Settings GLOBAL tenente tenente tenes 47 Setting the Types of Connected Devices OUTPUT SELECT sse 47 Adjusting the Overall Tone GLOBAL EQ 48 Controlling the Overall Effect of the Noise Suppressor Total 5 48 Controlling the Overall Reverb Level Total REVERBD eee 49 Setting the Sounds Output from SUB OUT SUB OUT 49 Setting the GK VOLUME Control and Switch and the Pedal Function SYSTEM COMEROL ASSIGN roe un abd ad LO 49 Having Values from an External Pedal GK VOLUME Control or Other Controller Carried Over When Patches are Called Up ASSIGN HOLD 50 Limiting the Patches That Can Be Switched PATCH EXTENT seeeeeeeeeeenenneees 50 Adjusting the 51 Setting the Output Signal and Level SYSTEM OUTPUT sss 51 Chapter 5 Using t
231. et 119 RRC2 IN Connector 14 52 POLYFX CH qme ddr dide ea 1 18 RRC2 170 POLYFX SW oot feed mee i ERIS 1 18 RRC2A 1 70 POG 103 RX PC MAP 2 1 1 61 171 POWER BEND 112 S POWER BEND Q heit a af 112 POP i UM ii CLGOROS cuu ee 167 PRE DELAY 126 148 Saving a Wee eet 38 PREDELAYl 130 131 Security SloE iine ettet e entre e E 14 106 111 119 129 134 135 SEINS TIst 6tl et e eprehenderit 167 Sensitivity for Each String sssssssss 45 SEPARATION nis ainai bets 128 A 123 SET MODE e eo e reete 46 166 SETTING IANO Mia 166 SHIFT ISt OU on tae ban oda Son 117 Signal Flow niim rete donee 183 SINGLE MODE e tiet eee 23 178 A 106 SpA M 107 142 144 127 134 SLOW GEAR etre 127 135 SOLO mui
232. ext and icons in the LCD screen may be difficult to make out This sets the signals and levels output for each of the VG 99 s output sometimes such as immediately after the VG 99 is turned on or after jacks and connectors MAIN OUT SUB OUT and DIGITAL OUT extended use The conditions at the place where you are using the VG 99 can also affect visibility Should you run into this problem try 1 Press SYSTEM adjusting the contrast 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 2 1 Press SYSTEM SYSTEM CATEGORY NAME a 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 SYSTEM E wa 4 POLI OUTPUT SE 3 Press F1 OUTPUT e cS LoD E Gk E SYSTEM OUTPUT MAIN HAIN SUB zug 3 Press F1 LCD MODE OUT LEVEL OUT LEVEL SYSTEM MISER ma ima 9 9 9 iz 1 2S TEM 4 Set the OUTPUT MODE parameter to SYSTEM with F1 SELECT or with the F1 knob fset to PATCH the values set under Setting the Output Signal 4 Turn the F1 knob to adjust the contrast and Level OUTPUT p 37 are enabled The value in the MIXER screen is disregarded and instead the value lt gt is applied 2S TEM HAIN SUB SUE MODE DIT LEVEL LEVEL PATCH lt gt lt 188 gt lt gt lt 100 gt o IIR ESL E124 Ced 5 Setthe signal and le
233. ext parameter 5 Adjust the parameters until you achieve the desired sound 6 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 If not saving the values press EXIT to return to the Play screen cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to DELAY REVERB 148 35 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Using Picking Dynamics to Control the Mix Between the Two Channels DYNAMIC You can control the mix between the two channels according to how strongly the strings are picked 1 Press DYNAMIC 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 D HBMIC TYRE OM DYHA A amp 3 Switch the Dynamic function on or off with F1 OFF ON 4 Select the Dynamic function type 5 Press PAGE lt gt to display Page 2 LOWER LEW LOWER 20 UPPER LEW 1828 UPPER c8 RELEASE Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to DYNAMIC p 149 36 Setting the Overall Patch Volume Level PATCH LEVEL You can set the overall patch volume level with the PATCH LEVEL knob Soon after the knob is turned the patch level settings value pops up in the screen VEL 168 Adjusting the Overall Patch Tone TOTAL EQ You can make separate settings in each individual patch for the overall tone after sounds have passed through the mixer 1 Press MIXER 2 Press PAGE lt g
234. finitely 1 Press CONTROL ASSIGN 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 CONTROL ASSIGNABLE MO 14 14 e 3 Press F1 PITCH 4 Select FREEZE with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob The D BEAM FREEZE screen appears CONTROL LI FITCH FREEZE FREEZE CH ATTACK REL LEVEL DIRECT FREEZE a 5 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob to select the channel with the sounds you want to freeze 6 Set each of the FREEZE parameters on Page 1 or Page 2 Lef gt For more detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to p 151 7 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play Screen 8 Pressthe D BEAM PITCH button causing the indicator to light 9 Play the guitar and while the sounds are playing cut across the D Beam with your hand or guitar neck 10 The FREEZE function switches on and the same sound continues to hold while the D Beam controller s blue indicator lights up 11 To switch FREEZE off swipe your hand or guitar neck across the D Beam controller s beam With D BEAM FREEZE SW set as the target in Control Assign you can control the FREEZE effect ON OFF using an external 79 Chapter 8 Other Functions pedal MIDI device or any of a variety of other controllers Changing the Pitch as with a Tremolo Arm T ARM You can press the D BEAM or RIBBON CONTROLLER PITCH bu
235. firm the following before turning off the power e Are the volume levels for the VG 99 and connected amp and other devices turned down completely 2 Turn off the power to the guitar amp power amp 3 Press POWER to turn off the VG 99 s power VG 99 V Guitar System CATEGORY RIBBON CONTROLLER PITCH FILTER 4 PAGE gt ASSIGNABLE The message NOW SHUTDOWN appears when the power is switched off The VG 99 s current settings are saved to memory at this time Do not disconnect the AC adaptor until this message is no longer displayed 24 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds First let s take a look at how the VG 99 is organized internally COSM Guitars You can use COSM modeling to create the tones of a variety of different guitars Available sounds include not just electric and acoustic guitar tones but extend beyond to include the sounds of synthesizers and other instruments and even non existent imaginary guitars Since the created sounds are based on the signals sent by the GK 3 for each individual string the system allows you to play these sounds while still retaining all the flavor created by the unique playing techniques and picking nuances that the guitar offers The VG 99 allows you to make settings for two different COSM guitar types at the same time enabling you to instantly switch what amounts to two actual guitars and create sounds in which two guitars seem to be play
236. furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The S symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The 6 symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet eM emm ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING 5 5 Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its AC adaptor G Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts 2 within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page e Never use or store the unit in places that are S Subject to temperatur
237. h and breadth Parameter Explanation Range CHORUS SW OFF ON Turns the CHORUS effect on off CHORUS MODE Selection for the chorus mode MONO This chorus effect outputs the same sound from both L channel and R channel STI Stereo1 This is a stereo chorus effect that adds differ ent chorus sounds to L channel and R channel ST2 Stereo2 This stereo chorus uses spatial synthesis with the direct sound output in the L channel and the effect sound output in the R channel RATE 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the chorus effect BPM BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the chorus effect To use it for doubling effect set the value to 0 PRE DELAY 0 0 ms 40 0 ms Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output By setting a longer pre delay time you can obtain an effect that sounds like more than one sound is being played at the same time doubling effect LOW CUT Low Cut Filter FLAT 55 2 800 Hz This lets you cut the low end component
238. he VG 99 in Combination with an FC 300 52 Connecting with the RRC2 IN tenente nnne 52 Settings Related tothe 0 ted a eco pe ie deste dia se i d penes partes eren 52 Settings for Control of the 300 52 Setting the Operation When Patches Are Switched 53 Activating the VG 99 s Tuner from the FC 300 QUICK TUNER eee 53 Setting the FC 300 Amp Control iie arte eem meo ied preti did coe te 54 Chapter 6 Using 00 55 ADOUEMEPDL habe erem Mn eu es DETE 55 What You Can Do Using MIDI 55 Main Types of MIDI Messages Handled by the 99 56 About the MIDI 57 Exchanging MIDI Messages sse nennen nennen tnnt 57 About MIDI Channels dert pe teo ttes 57 Bank Select and Program Cha gensonnenn esi aaee AE EE tenentes 58 Setting the MIDI Related Functions 58 Syncing to the MIDI CLOCK from an External 64 Playing an External Synthesizer Sound Module GUITAR TO MIDI 64 Setting the GUITAR TO MIDI Function System Parameters
239. he value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is shifted according to the picking The shift ing of the filter caused by the picking in creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with no movement POWER BEND A higher setting results in a darker sound At the same time the tone and volume also change with respect to fluctuations in pitch pro duced by using a tremolo bar or other techniques 0 100 The higher the value the more strained the sound becomes POWER BEND 0 100 The higher the value the more the sound will consist of mainly the harmonic compo nents thus creating a sound that exhibits al most no attack SUSTAIN 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain COSM GUITAR DUAL Parameter Exslanation Range FILTER CUTOFF 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The sound gets brighter harder as the value is raised FILTER RESO Filter Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the s
240. higher e Intel processor RAM e 512 MBytes or more In interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice Free space required on hard disk e 190 MBytes more Display resolution Color depth e 1024 768 or higher 32 000 colors or more Although Roland has tested numerous configurations and has determined that on average a computer system similar to that described above will permit normal operation of the VG 99 Editor and VG 99 Librarian Roland cannot guarantee that a given computer can be used satisfactorily with the VG 99 Editor and VG 99 Librarian based solely on the fact that it meets the above requirements This is because there are too many other variables that may influence the processing environment including differences in motherboard design and the particular combination of other devices involved 185 Chapter 10 Appendices Error Messages If there has been a mistake in an operation or if the operation is not executed properly an error message will appear in the display Please follow the instructions indicated in the message to resolve the issue DATA WRITE ERROR Writing to the memory for storage of user data failed O The unit may be damaged Consult the nearest Roland service center MIDI BUFFER FULL RRC2 BUFFER FULL USB BUFFER FULL The data cannot be processed correctly d
241. i This KEY parameter is the same as the Key setting in the NAME KEY BPM section p 163 and FX MOD1 2 HARMONIST Altering either one changes the key HARMO Harmony 20 20 USER This sets the pitch for the harmony interval rel ative to the input sound When this is set to USER you can set this to the desired harmony in USER INTERVAL USER INTERVAL C B 24 24 This sets the output pitch relative to the in put pitch for the selected key Creating Harmony Scales User Scale When HARMO is set to any value from 2oct to 2oct and the harmony does not sound the way you intend use a User scale You can set the corresponding pitches to be output for each input pitch 1 Set HARMO to USER in the Harmony screen 2 Press PAGE BD to display Page 2 The User Interval screen appears 3 UsePAGE lt zu p gt F1 F6 and the F1 F6 knob to set the amount of pitch shift for each voice 117 4 o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide POLY POLY FX Poly Effect Parameter POLY DIST Poly Distortion Bande Explanation 9 You can individually distort the sound of each string to get a sound POLYFX SW Poly Effect Switch that can be played chordally without breaking up OFF ON Turns the poly effect on off
242. idually for each of the six strings of STRING 1 6 Make the settings with F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs Set the following parameters BANK MSB Explanation OFF 0 127 This sets the Bank Select MSB BANK LSB Explanation OFF 0 127 This sets the Bank Select LSB PC Explanation OFF 1 128 This sets the Program Number The MIDI channel over which the messages are output in POLY mode is only the basic channel In MONO mode the messages are output over the six channels spanning from the basic channel up to the channel numbered five above the basic channel Chapter 7 Using the VG 99 Connected to a Computer Via USB Before Using the USB Connection By using USB with the VG 99 you ll be able to exchange digital audio signals and MIDI messages with your computer Installing and Setting the USB Driver Use of the VG 99 s USB functionality requires that the USB driver first be installed on the computer The dedicated VG 99 driver is contained on the VG 99 Software CD ROM included with the VG 99 As the program and procedures used in installing the driver vary according to the operating environment carefully read the following Readme file contained on the VG 99 Software CD ROM before use Using OS Contained location Windows XP Driver XP Readme_E htm Windows Vista Driver Vista Readme_E htm Mac OS X Driver Readme_E htm What is a USB Driver A USB
243. ifications e Category 5 Cat5 or above Maximum length of 15 meters Cable designed for straight through connection Ethernet cables designed for crossover connections cannot be used Settings Related to the FC 300 If connecting the VG 99 with an FC 300 using an RRC2 cable make the settings below as needed Settings for Control of the FC 300 This sets the method for controlling the FC 300 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 SYSTEM 1T E 5 m 8 DIRECT EI MIDI 3 Press F5 FC 300 SvSTEM SYS Ex GUICK MODE CHANGE FE 300 OFF piate P 4 Set the SYS MODE with F1 OFF ON or with the F1 knob Settings Description When connected to the VG 99 the FC 300 automat ically changes to Exclusive mode and functions in accordance with the settings made with the VG 99 This is the setting normally selected You can con ON trol the FC 300 even without matching the VG 99 s and FC 300 s Device IDs Connecting an FC 300 automatically switches the FC 300 to Exclusive mode Normally you should select this setting Select OFF when using the FC 300 in a mode other OFF than System Exclusive mode The mode does not switch automatically Chapter 5 Using the VG 99 Combination with an 300 Setting the Operation When Patches Are Switched This set
244. ile contained on the VG 99 Software CD ROM OS Location Windows XP Driver XP Readme_E htm Windows Vista Driver Vista Readme_E htm Mac OS X Driver Readme E htm Problems with Sounds No sound Low volume Q Is there a short in any connecting cable Try replacing the connecting cable L Are the VG 99 and other devices connected properly Check the connections with the other devices p 16 T Is the power to the connected amp or mixer not turned on or is the volume turned down Check the settings for the connected device 2 Is the OUTPUT LEVEL knob turned down completely Adjust the knob to an appropriate setting p 20 J Is the tuner J The direct sound is not output when the tuner is on if the volume setting during tuning is set to MUTE ON p 22 Q Is the SYSTEM GK CONNCT set properly If a Divided pickup is connected set SYSTEM GK GK CONNCT to ON if AUTO does not function well Ifa Divided pickup is not connected set SYSTEM GK GK CONNCT to OFF b Is COSM GUITAR A or COSM GUITAR B switched on No sounds from the Divided pickup will be played if COSM GUITAR is switched off Switch on the COSM GUITAR 1 Is A B BALANCE set correctly Set A B BALANCE for the channel in which sounds are being played i 186 Chapter 10 Appendices 4
245. ilizes A feedback effect is created when the effect switches on the feedback disap pears when the OSC effect switches off NATURAL Analyzes the pitch of the guitar sound being input and then creates a feedback sound RISE TIME 1 0 100 This determines the time needed for the vol ume of the feedback sound to reach its max imum from the moment the effect is turned on RISE TIME 1 0 100 This determines the time needed for the vol ume of the one octave higher feedback sound to reach its maximum from the mo ment the effect is turned on FB LEVEL Feedback Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the feedback sound LEVEL Feedback Level 1 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the one octave higher feedback sound VIB RATE Vibrato Rate 1 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the vibrato when the feedbacker is on BPM BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time VIB DEPTH Vibrato Depth 1 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the vibrato when the feedbacker is on 1 Setting available with MODE set to OSC 135 Q 3 P 17 o
246. imum 24 424 es the pitch while setting a positive value TRANS lowers the pitch FILTER This passes only portions of the sound s frequency ranges giving the sound a unique tone You can add different types of expression to the sound by changing the frequencies pitches that are passed Parameter Range Explanation This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH FILTER CH Filter Channel This selects the channel to which the filter is applied Low 0 126 High 1 127 You can set the range for control of target parameters within the RIBBON CONTROL LER s response range Target parameters are controlled within the range set with RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH You should normally set RANGE LOW to 0 and RANGE HIGH to 127 A The filter is applied only to Channel A B The filter is applied only to Channel B A B The filter is applied to both Channel A and B TYPE This selects the filter type LPF This filter passes only the low frequencies BPF This filter passes frequencies only in the specified range HPF This filter passes only the high frequencies FREQ MIN Frequency Minimum 0 100 This sets the frequency when the RIBBON CONTROLLER is touched at the end closest to the front the minimum value Raising the value i
247. in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH Low 0 126 High 1 127 You can set the controllable range for target parameters within the GK Volume s opera tional range Target parameters are con trolled within the range set with RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH You should nor mally set RANGE LOW to 0 and RANGE HIGH to 127 150 GK 51 52 DOWN S1 UP S2 Switch Parameter Explanation Range SW Switch OFF ON This setting determines whether control using DOWN S1 and UP S2 is switched on or off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the maximum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MODE Specify how the value will change in response to an operation When the DOWN S1 UP S2 POSI of the GK SETTING is set to REVRSE position the function of DOWN S1 UP S2 will be reversed When KEY BPM AMPCTL BPM TAP FX DELAY HOLD REC or FX DELAY HOLD STOP is set for the TARGET PARAMETER control is available regardles
248. inal sound in semitone increments 12 12 A setting of 12 lowers the pitch one octave while 12 raises the pitch one octave PITCH A FINE This finely adjusts the pitch A setting of 50 PITCH B FINE lowers the pitch one semitone 50 raises the 50 50 pitch by one semitone You can use this FINE setting effectively in the DUET feature that follows PITCH SW Pitch Switch 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time for the pitch to shift when the PITCH SW parameter is switched and the sound changes to a lower pitch When set to zero the pitch changes instantly at higher values the pitch falls more slowly This setting allows you to switch on and off the pitch shift which en ables the pitch of the HEXA VCO sound to shift in response to the pitch of the sound caused by the string s vibration PITCH SHIFT is applied only to the HEXA VCO not the HEXA DISTORTION Set MODE to VCO or V D when using the pitch shift function VIBRATO You can apply an electronic vibrato effect to the HEXA VCO SW Switch OFF The pitch of the original source sound is un changed A The shift in pitch set with PITCH A and PITCH A FINE is applied B The shift in pitch set with PITCH B and PITCH B FINE is applied DUET OFF ON When DUET is set to ON then in addition to the HEXA VCO a sawtooth wave is played at the same pitches as the source sound adding greater breadth to the sound iU
249. ing all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night IMPORTANT NOTES When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal Roland EV 5 BOSS FV 500L 500H with a connection cable stereo 1 4 phone stereo 1 4 phone sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the manufacturer of the cable Unauthorized duplication reproduction hiring and lending prohibited The usable range of D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity
250. ing at the same time You can use the Alternate Tuning function to change the pitch of each COSM guitar string individually Poly Effects These are original VG effects that can be applied independently to each string You can choose which of the two COSM guitars the effects are applied to COSM Amps Since this technology models the guitar amp circuitry and speaker characteristics the modeled amps simulate exactly the behavior of the actual amps even in the way distortion is added and the way the tone controls work You can configure preamps and speaker cabinets as you like you can even model the amp s studio miking The VG 99 produces two independent COSM amp systems at the same time which allows you to process each of the two COSM guitars through a different amp Effects The VG 99 is equipped with two BOSS GT PRO class multi effects systems You can apply effects separately to each of the two COSM guitars Mixer In addition to having full freedom in mixing the sounds from the two COSM guitars you can also output the two guitars separately to MAIN OUT and SUB OUT The Dynamifunction further allows you to use the force of your picking attack to switch between the two guitar sounds or for many other functions Furthermore the mixer section also includes delay reverb and an equalizer enabling you to adjust the overall tone of the patches Setting the COSM GUITAR Tone 1 Press MODELING TYPE 2 Press PA
251. ing to the acoustics of the performance venue This setting does not affect the individual patch settings 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE to display Page 6 GLOBAL HS REVERB TEE BE 3 Adjust the level with the F2 knob This adjusts the noise suppressor threshold levels set in each patch 0 200 This adjustment has no effect on patches in which reverb is switched off To use the levels set in the individual patches set this to 100 Setting the Sounds Output from SUB OUT SUB OUT LEVEL This setting selects which signals are output from the SUB OUT jacks 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE to display Page 6 GLOEAL REVERE SUEDUT ima 186 Se EIE 3 Adjust the setting with the knob This adjusts the output level set in each patch 0 200 To use the levels set in the individual patches set this to 100 Setting the GK VOLUME Control and Switch and the Pedal Function SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 SYSTEM 8 wal LoD DIRECT CTL HIDI 3 Press F4 CTL 4 Press to display Page 1 H zizlaHBELECFRBTCH ASS IGHAELEC FATCH 2 ASS IGHAELEt 3 ASS FATCH TLE EXF FEDAL ASSIGNABLE FATCH CTL ASSIGNABLE 3 5 Select any setting from GK VOL to FC 300 CTL8 with F2 SEL or F3 SEL or the F2 F3 knobs then use
252. ions z 9 Use the D Beam or ribbon controller to apply Adding Nuance to the Sound the filter and add nuance to the sound F ILTE R With D BEAM FILTER SW or RIBBON FILTER SW and D BEAM FILTER CONTROL and RIBBON FILTER CONTROL set as the target in Control Assign you can control FILTER CONTROL using an external pedal MIDI device or any of a variety of other controllers You can press the D BEAM or RIBBON CONTROLLER FILTER button to apply the FILTER effect and add nuance to the tone in Channel A or B or both channels 1 Press CONTROL ASSIGN 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 for the D Beam or Page 3 for the ribbon controller CONTROL HssIBsMHELE RF 86 96 do H CONTROL x ASSIGNABLE Fos ACT 3 Press F2 FILTER 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 The D BEAM FILTER or the RIBBON FILTER screen appears RESO LEVEL 5 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select the channel to which you want the effect to be applied 6 Set each of the FILTER parameters on Page 1 cf gt For more detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to FILTER p 152 p 153 7 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play Screen 8 Press the D BEAM or RIBBON CONTROLLER FILTER button causing the indicator to light 81 Chapter 8 Other Functions Changing the Sounds with the Knobs as You Play DIRECT
253. ions are automatically synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is un able to receive the external Clock MAIN Signals received via USB are transmitted to the VG 99 s internal section USB MIDI This sets the routing of signals output from the USB connector AUTO MIDI Operations are synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via MIDI However operations are automatically synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is unable to receive the external Clock OFF Signals are not output from the USB connec tor AUTO RRC2 Operations are synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via the RRC2 connector However operations are automatically syn chronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is unable to receive the external Clock MAIN MIDI signals from the VG 99 are output MIDI MIDI signals received at MIDI IN are out put RRC2 MIDI signals received through RRC2 are output RRC2 This sets the routing of signals received via RRC OFF Signals are not received through RRC2 MIDI MAIN Signals received at the RRC2 connector are transmitted to the VG 99 s internal section MIDI IN RRC2 This sets the routing of signals arriving at the MIDI IN connector This sets the routing of signals output from the RRC2 connector OFF Signals are not received at MIDI IN OFF Signals ar
254. is allows you to give another VG 99 the identical settings and to save effect sound settings to MIDI sequencers and other such devices Controlling the VG 99 from an External MIDI Device Switching Patch Numbers The VG 99 s patches switch immediately in response to Program Change messages received from external MIDI devices You can set the correspondence between MIDI Program Change messages and the VG 99 s patches with the RX PC MAP RECEIVE PROGRAM CHANGE p 61 Set this to ensure correspondence of the VG 99 s effect sounds with those of other MIDI devices The connections shown in the diagram below are used when playing your guitar backed by an automatic sequencer performance The VG 99 s patches change automatically when a Program number is entered with the performance data at the point where you want the VG 99 s patches to change ig MIDI OUT 55 Chapter 6 Using MIDI Receiving Control Change Messages The VG 99 can receive Control Change messages to control specified parameters while a performance is in progress Set the parameters to be controlled with Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 Receiving Data The VG 99 can receive data transmitted from other VG 99 s and data saved to MIDI sequencers Main Types of MIDI Messages Handled by the VG 99 In order to be able to convey the full range of exp
255. is di rected more towards the speaker Parameter Explanation MIC POS Mic Position This simulates the microphone position CENTER Simulates the condition that the micro phone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10cm Simulates the condition that the micro phone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone MIC LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Parameter i Explanation Range CUSTOM SPEAKER 1 SIZE 5 15 Selects the size of speaker LOW 10 10 Adjusts the speaker section s low frequency tone HIGH 10 10 Adjusts the speaker section s high frequen cy tone NUMBER x1 x2 x4 x8 Sets the number of speakers CABINET Selects the speaker cabinet type OPEN This is an open backed cabinet CLOSE This type of cabinet features an enclosed rear panel 1 Setting available when SP TYPE is set to CUSTOM 142 5 CUSTOM Parameter Explanation CUSTOM Selects the basic type of preamp JC CLEAN This is the sound of the Roland JC 120 TW CLEAN This models a Fender Twin Reverb CRUNCH This is a crunch sound that can produce nat ural distortion VO DRIVE This models the drive sound of a VOX AC 30TB BG LEAD This models the lead sound of the MESA Boogie combo amp MS HI GAIN Th
256. is models the sound of a Marshall with a modified midrange boost MODERN STACK Models the sound of the Channel 2 MOD ERN Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier BOTTOM 50 50 This controls the input sound s low fre quency range and adjusts the amount of dis tortion in the low frequency range EDGE 50 50 This controls the input sound s high fre quency range and adjusts the amount of dis tortion in the high frequency range BASS FREQ Bass Frequency 50 50 Adjusts the frequency affected by the BASS knob TREBLE FREQ Treble Frequency 50 50 Adjusts the frequency affected the BLE knob LOW 50 50 Adjusts the preamp section s low frequency tone HIGH 50 50 Adjusts the preamp section s high frequen cy tone GAIN 0 120 Adjusts the distortion of the amp BASS 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range MIDDLE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range TREBLE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range PRESENCE 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Explanation LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Be careful not to raise the Level setting too high BRIGHT Turns the bright setting on off 1 OFF Bright is not used ON Bright is switched on to create
257. iter type BOSS LIMITR This selects a stereo limiter RACK 160D This models a dbx 160X VTG RACK U This models a UREI 1178 ATTACK 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are played Higher values result in s sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound THRSH Threshold 0 100 Adjust this as appropriate for the input sig nal from your guitar When the input signal level exceeds this threshold level limiting will be applied RATIO 1 1 1 This selects the compression ratio used with signals in excess of the threshold level REL Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the threshold until when limit ing is removed LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume SUB EQ Sub Equalizer This adjusts the tone as a sub equalizer A parametric type is adopted for the high middle and low middle range Parameter Range Explanation TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the overall EQ volume LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LO
258. ith the PC parameter p 70 in GUITAR TO MIDI are not transmitted Chapter 6 Using MIDI used it does impose certain limitations for example Setting the GU ITAR TO MI DI permitting only one tone to be selected for all of the strings Function Patch Parameters All patches are set to MONO mode at the factory Patch parameters are settings made individually for each patch The Write procedure is required to save changes When chords are played in POLY mode pitch bends and in the settings Carry out the Write procedure as needed glides change in semitone increments while vibrato cannot be used Pitch bends and glides work normally in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE POLY Mode when playing single notes 1 Press GUITAR TO MIDI The GTR TO MIDI screen appears BTE TO HIDI SVSTEM 2 Press F3 PATCH 3 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 5 TO HIDI PHIL FLAY CHRO HOLD MODE FEEL MATIC HOMO FEELi1 OFF HOLT 8 4 Setthe mode with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob MONO MONO Mode GTA TO MIDI PATCH nope Riffo A OFF 14 In this mode one channel per string is used thus using a total of six channels Since each string uses a different MIDI channel you can select a different tone for each string using string bending or continuously varying the pitch on a specific string however this requires use of a multitimbral sound module
259. ives a mellow clean sound JAZZ COMBO This is a sound suited to jazz FULL RANGE This is a sound with flat response Good for acoustic guitar BRIGHT CLEAN bright clean tone TW CLEAN 141 CLEAN TWIN This models a Fender Twin Reverb PRO CRUNCH This models a Fender Pro Reverb TWEED This models a Fender Bassman 4 x 10 Com bo WARM CRUNCH This gives a mellow crunch sound CRUNCH p 141 CRUNCH This is a crunch sound that can produce nat ural distortion BLUES This is a sound suited to blues WILD CRUNCH This is a crunch sound with wild distortion STACK CRUNCH This is a crunch sound with high gain COMBO p 141 VO DRIVE This models the drive sound of a VOX AC 30TB VO LEAD This models the lead sound of the VOX AC 30TB VO CLEAN This models the clean sound of the VOX AC 30TB MATCH DRIVE This models the sound input to left input on a Matchless D C 30 FAT MATCH This models the sound of a Matchless with a modified high gain MATCH LEAD This models the sound input to right input on a Matchless D C 30 MS HI GAIN This models the sound of a Marshall with a modified midrange boost POWER STACK This provides the sound of a stack amp with active type tone circuitry R FIER p 141 CLEAN Models the sound of the Channel 1 CLEAN Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifi er RAW Models the sound of the Channel 2 RAW Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifi er VINTAGE 1 Models the sound of the Chan
260. ke character to the sound Parameter p Explanation Range RATE 0 100 This sets the rate of the flanging effect BPM o BPM When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time DEPTH 0 100 Determines the depth of the flanging effect MANUAL 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency at which to ap ply the effect RESO Resonance 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feed back Increasing the value will emphasize the ef fect creating a more unusual sound SEPARATION 0 100 Adjusts the diffusion The diffusion increas es as the value increases LOW CUT Low Cut Filter FLAT 55 Hz 800Hz This lets you cut the low end component be low the set frequency to create a clear dis tinct low end thereby bringing out the high end of the effect When FLAT is selected the low cut filter will have no effect EFFECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the flanger DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound FX Effects TREML Tremolo Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Parameter
261. l of the broadcasting station you wish to watch MIDI includes channels numbered 1 16 MIDI messages are transmitted to receiving instruments set to the same channel as the transmitting device s 57 Chapter 6 Using MIDI Bank Select and Program Change Bank Select and Program Change are MIDI messages generally used for switching patches Normally patches are switched using Program Change messages However if Program Changes alone are used you ll only be able to select up to a maximum of 128 different patches Because of this some devices also employ the Bank Select expanding the number of selectable patches Patches for these devices are assigned numbers combining Bank Select MSB LSB numbers 0 127 and Program numbers 1 128 The VG 99 disregards the Bank Select LSB Setting the MIDI Related Functions This section describes the VG 99 s MIDI related functions Set these according to how they are to be used 1 Press SYSTEM The System screen appears 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 SYSTEM AR Stay DIRECT i i HIDI 3 Press F6 MIDI The MIDI settings screen appears The following section describes the settings used with MIDI MIDI Channel This sets the channel used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages corresponding to the VG 99 s patches and operations Also refer to Playing an External Synthesizer Sound Module GUITAR TO MIDI p 64 if you are using the GUITAR TO
262. lizer Switch SUB EQ SW Sub Equalizer Switch OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone NS Noise Suppressor Parameter Explanation Range NS 20 20dB This controls the global threshold level for the noise suppressor settings in each patch This feature is effective when you connect a different guitar or for adjusting for changes in noise levels in the performance venue It does not affect the settings in each individu al patch To use the settings contained in the individual patches set this to 0 dB REVERB Parameter Explanation REVERB 0 200 This controls the global reverb level for the reverb settings in each patch Adjusting this reverb level is effective for adjusting to the acoustics of the performance space It does not affect the settings in each individual patch To use the settings contained in the individual patches set this to 100 177 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide TUNER SUB OUT LEVEL Parameter Range Explanation SUB OUT LEVEL 0 200 This controls the global output level from the SUB OUT connectors It does not affect the settings in each individual patch To use line level 4 dBu as the output level
263. ll be no sound CENTER Use the center pickup TONE C F Use both front and center pickups 0 100 Adjusts the tone The standard value is 100 FRONT Use the front pickup lowering the value creates a softer tone VOL Volume STRING 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there ROUND Selects the sound of round wound strings will be no sound FLAT Selects the sound of flat wound strings TONE VOL CURVE Volume Curve 0 100 Adjusts the tone The standard value is 100 Sets the curve for the change in volume with the VOL parameter lowering the value creates a softer tone AB Volume TE LP P90 RICK 335 L4 A Parameter Explanation PU SEL Pickup Select Use the rear pickup Use both rear and front pickups FRONT Use the front pickup Set value VOL Volume 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there TYPE ill b d SINGLE Single coil pickup TONE DOUBLE Double coil pickup 0 100 Adjusts the tone The standard value is 100 PIEZO Piezo pickup lowering the value creates a softer tone AC A hypothetical pickup ideal for picking up the sound of an acoustic guitar LIPS POS Position Parameter 5 320mm Specifies the distance from the bridge at R Explanation which the pickup is placed Larger values ange i will produce the effect of the pickup being PU SEL Pickup Select further from the bridge REAR Use the rear pickup Ifthe Pickup Type has been set to PIEZO R C Use both center and rea
264. lug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be AN placed so they are out of the reach of children e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit S e Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with 7 wet hands when plugging into or unplugging N from an outlet or this unit e If you need to move the instrument take note of the precautions listed below It should be handled carefully all the while keeping it level Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage Check to make sure the screws or the attached knob bolts securing the unit to the stand have not become loose Fasten them again securely whenever you notice any loosening Disconnect the power cord Disconnect all cords coming from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 24 Q e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet e Keep any screws you may remove and the included screws in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES
265. ly Effect p 118 9 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the values press EXIT to return to the Play screen FX Effects Here s how to make settings for the effects 1 Press FX 2 Switch the individual effects on or off with the F1 F6 ON OFF Each press of PAGE lt A We takes you to another effect screen in which parameter settings are made All effects that on can be alternately switched off indicator unlit and on indicator lit together by pressing FX 3 Press F1 F6 to select the effect you want to edit 4 Adjust the desired parameter with F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs Each press of PAGE We takes you to the settings screen for the next parameter 5 Adjust the parameters until you achieve the sound you want cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to FX Effects p 120 6 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not need to save the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 31 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Rearranging the Effect and Amp Connection Sequence CHAIN You can freely set the order in which the effects and COSM amps are connected 1 Press CHAIN The Chain screen is displayed Ifthe effects and COSM amps are off OFF is indicated 2 Select the channel for
266. m Messages System messages include Exclusive messages messages required for synchronized performances and messages designed to prevent problems with operation Exclusive Messages Exclusive messages are used for handling sounds unique to a particular device and other such messages Basically you can exchange messages between devices of the same type from the same manufacturer Using Exclusive messages you can store parameter settings to sequencers and transmit parameter settings to other VG 99s To exchange Exclusive messages the Device ID numbers for each of the instruments must match Chapter 6 Using MIDI About the MIDI Implementation While the use of MIDI allows various devices to communicate with each other this does not mean that it enables exchanges of all information The data that can be exchanged between any two connected devices is limited to the messages common to both devices Therefore MIDI device owner s manuals always contain a MIDI Implementation chart which allows the user to determine quickly what MIDI messages the particular device supports Comparing the MIDI Implementation charts for each device allows you to confirm what information can be exchanged and how to accomplish this Since these charts are uniform in size you can overlay the charts for the transmitting and receiving devices when checking the information Fold here MIDI Device aN 2 Device Function Transmit Recognized Remarks
267. meter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 REC MODE DELAY HOLD STOP FREQ CHORUS SW PEAK MODI A WAH CHORUS MODE MOD RATE RATE DEPTH DEPTH LEVEL CHORUS PREDELAY DIRECT LEVEL LOW CUT RANGE MODI OCTAVE HIGH CUT MOD OCTAVE OCTAVE LEVEL EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL REVERB SW VOICE TYPE MODE 2 REVERB TIME PITCH1 2 PREDELAY MODI 5 FINE1 2 REVERB LOW CUT MOD2 P SHIFT PREDELAY1 2 HIGH CUT LEVEL1 2 DENS FEEDBACK1 EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL VOICE MOD SW HARMI 2 MOD1 MOD2 MOD TYPE MOD1 HARMONIST PREDELAY1 2 TYPE MOD2 HARMONIST LEVEL1 2 RATE FEEDBACK1 DEPTH DIRECT LEVEL MANUAL PITCH MIN A EX B EX MOD1 PHASER MOD2 PHASER RESO A FX B FX PITCH MAX MODI PDL BEND STEP RATE MOD PDL BEND PEDAL POS EFFECT LEVEL EFFECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL DIRECT LEVEL RATE X OVER FREQ DEPTH LOW RATE MANUAL LOW DEPTH MOD1 FLANGER 5 LOW PREDELAY 1 2X2CHORUS MOD2 FLANGER SEPARATION MOD 2OCHORUS LOW LEVEL LOW CUT HIGH RATE EFFECT LEVEL HIGH DEPTH DIRECT LEVEL HIGH PREDELAY WAVE SHAPE HIGH LEVEL MOD1 TREMOLO MOD2 TREMOLO RATE SPEED DEPTH RATE SLOW WAVE SHAPE MOD1 ROTARY RATE FAST A 1PAN MOD2 RATE MOD2 ROTARY RISE TIME DEPTH FALL TIME MODE DEPTH POLARITY RATE SENS MODTUNEY DEPTH MOD2 UNI V MOD1 T WAH FREQ LEVER T WAH PEAK RATE LEVEL MODI VIBRATO DEPTH DIRECT LEVEL VIBRATO TRIG RISE TIME 160
268. minimum val ue switching to ON maximum value while the CONTROL button is held down LATCH The setting alternately switches to OFF minimum value and ON maximum val ue each time the CONTROL button is pressed D BEAM PITCH Parameter Range Explanation PITCH TYPE This selects the effect applied when PITCH is pressed T ARM This feature changes the pitch of the COSM guitar as a tremolo arm does Use of a tremolo arm can be simulated by holding your guitar neck or hand over the D BEAM controller FREEZE This continuously holds the sound of the COSM guitar You can switch the FREEZE effect on and off by holding your guitar neck or hand over the D BEAM controller Parameter Range Explanation T ARM CH Tremolo Arm Channel This selects the channel to which the tremolo T ARM is applied A T ARM is applied only to Channel A B T ARM is applied only to Channel B A B T ARM is applied to both Channel A and B TYPE This selects the T ARM type S TYPE This simulates the characteristics of a synchronized type tremolo arm on the Fender Stratocaster B TYPE This simulates a Bigsby type tremolo arm on the Gibson or the Rickenbacker F TYPE This simulates the characteristics of a Floyd Rose s locking type tremolo arm TRANS This simulates how a Trans tremolo type arm changes the pitch of all the strings equally DOWN MI
269. n 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected the centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Controlling the Overall Effect of the Noise Suppressor Total NS This controls the overall threshold value for the noise suppressor settings in the individual patches This is an effective tool when guitars are changed during performances and for making adjustments in response to noise levels at the performance venue This is an overall setting and does not alter the individual patch settings 1 Press GLOBAL 2 Press PAGE to display Page 6 T 3 Adjust the level with the F1 knob This adjusts the noise suppressor threshold levels set in each patch 20 dB 20 dB This adjustment has no effect on patches in which the noise suppressor is off To use the levels set in the individual patches set this to 0 dB 48 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Controlling the Overall Reverb Level Total REVERB This controls the overall reverb level settings in the individual patches This is effective for adjust
270. n Range WAH SW OFF ON Turns the WAH effect on off TYPE Selects the type of wah CRY WAH This models the sound of the CRY BABY wah pedal popular in the 70s VOWAH This models the sound of the VOX V846 FATWAH This a wah sound featuring a bold tone LIGHT WAH This wah has a refined sound with no un usual characteristics 7STR WAH This expanded wah features a variable range compatible with seven string and bar itone guitars RESO WAH This completely original effect offers en hancements on the characteristic resonances produced by analog synth filters CUSTOM Custom wah PEDAL POS Pedal Position 0 100 Adjusts the position of the wah pedal This expanded wah features a variable range compatible with seven string and baritone guitars LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume FX Effects Parameter Range Explanation CUSTOM 1 TYPE This selects the basic sound when the TYPE parameter is set to CUSTOM CRY WAH This models the sound of the CRY BABY wah pedal popular in the 70s VOWAH This models the sound of the VOX 846 FATWAH This a wah sound featuring a bold tone LIGHT WAH This wah has a refined smooth sound 7STR WAH Wah featuring a broader range of variations for the seven string guitar Q 50 50 Adjusts the amount of characteristic effect applied to the wah tone RANGE LOW 50 50 Selects the tone produced when the pedal is ba
271. n Real Besure to adjust the CALIBRATION directly above the D Beam controller Time with the D Beam and Ribbon Controllers Adjusting the D Beam CALIBRATION The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on the A amount of light in the vicinity of the controller and the object e g hand guitar neck used to operate it Perform this adjustment so you can control the tone in the intended range 1 Press SYSTEM When the message MISSING THE TARGET appears it 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 indicates that the calibration is not being performed correctly The CALIBRATION setting is a system parameter so the Write SYSTEM 1 procedure is not required CATEGORY NAME Al MISC meer us iirapeppp OUTPUT CA A 3 Press F5 CALIB 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 D 5 Set the beam s responsive range as you actually operate the D Beam controller First hold the object you will use to activate the controller your hand guitar neck etc at the point farthest from the VG 99 in the range you want the controller to respond and press F1 SetMIN Next hold the object at the closest point in the range you want the controller to respond and press F4 SetMAX 6 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen NOTE The D Beam controller s response may also vary with the stage lighting use
272. n arched top and back This is suitable for simulating semi acoustic or full acoustic electric guitars METAL A metal body with a single round cone res onator This is suitable for bottle neck slide playing etc BANJO This models a general banjo strung with five strings Changing the size will produce an effect as if the tuning were changed SIZE 50 50 Specifies the size of the body This modifies the resonant frequency to simulate changes in body size A setting of 0 will produce a normal resonance RESO Resonation 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation The resonation increases as the value is raised ATTACK 0 100 Specifies the strength of the attack when you pluck the string strongly As this setting is increased the attack will be sharper and the sound will be crisper The effect is easier to discern with chords than with single notes 107 gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM GUITAR AC Common Parameters Parameter Besides the other COSM AC parameters the VG 99 also includes xd Explanation following shared parameters MIX LEVEL Estee eel Explanation COSM GUITAR 5 0 100 Specifies the level of the COSM GUITAR EQ Equalizer fore it is output A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be NORMAL PU Normal Pickup
273. n recording with the VG 99 connected to a multitrack recorder Use the LINE PHONES setting if you are using a speaker simulator EQ MAIN Equalizer Main EQ SUB Equalizer Sub Parameter Explanation MAIN EQ Main Equalizer SUB EQ Sub Equalizer fore it is output A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be EQ MAIN is applied to the output from MAIN OUT EQ SUB is applied to the output from SUB OUT Parameter Explanation Range HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID F REQ High Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain MAIN EQ SW Main Equa
274. ncreases the set frequency 153 gt o Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MASTER EXP PEDAL Expression Pedal Parameter Explanation Range SW Switch OFF ON This setting determines whether control us ing an expression pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack is switched on or off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH Low 0 126 High 1 127 You can set the range for control of target parameters within an expression pedal s response range Target parameters are controlled within the range set with RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH You should normally set RANGE LOW to 0 and RANGE HIGH to 127 CTL3 CTL4 Control3 Control4 Parameter Explanation Range SW Switch OFF ON This setting determines whether control us ing a footswitch connected to the CTL3 CTL4 jack is switched on or off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER 157 MI
275. nd off When the guitar amp s channel switch jack is connected to the FC 300 s AMP CONTROL 1 jack or AMP CONTROL 2 jack you can then switch the guitar amp channels with the VG 99 s AMP or AMP CTL2 parameter 1 Usethe PATCH VALUE dial to select the patch you want to set 2 Press NAME KEY BPN HANE KEY HANE KEY HI AMF AMF CTL1i CTLz alor 4 Use F1 and F2 or the F1 and F2 knobs to set AMP CTL1 and AMP CTL2 to ON or OFF Available Settings Description OFF FC 300 s CTL1 and AMP CTL2 parameters are set to OFF ON The FC 300 s AMP CTL1 and AMP CTL2 parameters are set to ON Chapter 6 Using MIDI About MIDI MIDI an abbreviation for Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a universal standard that enables musical instruments to exchange musical performance data messages concerning changes in the sounds and other information Any device that conforms to the MIDI specifications can communicate to the extent that is relevant to both devices with any other MIDI device even those that were made by a different manufacturer or that belong to a different category of instrument Under the MIDI specifications performance data produced by such actions as playing a keyboard or pressing a pedal is handled as MIDI messages What You Can Do Using MIDI Using MIDI you can carry out the following operations with the VG 9
276. nel 2 VIN TAGE Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier MODERN 1 Models the sound of the Channel 2 MOD ERN Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier VINTAGE 2 Models the sound of the Channel 3 VIN TAGE Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier MODERN 2 Models the sound of the Channel 3 MOD ERN Mode on the MESA Boogie DUAL Rectifier T AMP p 141 CLEAN This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp AMPI CRUNCH This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp AMP2 LEAD This models a Hughes amp Kettner Triamp AMP3 EDGE LEAD A sharp lead sound HI GAIN p 141 SLDN This models a Soldano SLO 100 DRIVE STACK This is a drive sound with high gain LEAD STACK This is a lead sound with high gain HEAVY LEAD A powerful lead sound featuring extreme distortion 140 5 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Type Explanation METAL p 141 JC CLEAN TW CLEAN CRUNCH COMBO BG LEAD MS STACK R FIRE T AMP HI GAIN METAL 5150 DRIVE This models the lead channel of a Peavey Parameter METAL STACK This is a drive sound suited to metal Range Explanation METAL LEAD This is a lead sound suited to metal GAIN TOM p 14 SUSTO 3 0 120 Adjusts the distortion of the amp CUSTOM Custom amp BASS BASS AMP p 144 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency VINTAGE Models the Ampeg B 15 range MODERN
277. ntly AUTO USB The VG 99 is synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via USB However operations are automatically synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is unable to receive the external Clock AUTO MIDI The VG 99 is synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via MIDI However operations are automatically synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is unable to receive the external Clock AUTO RRC2 The VG 99 is synchronized to the MIDI Clock received via RRC2 However operations are automatically synchronized to the VG 99 s internal Clock if the VG 99 is unable to receive the external Clock Playing an External Synthesizer Sound Module GUITAR TO MIDI The VG 99 can convert performance data to MIDI Note and Bend messages and output these messages Using this function allows you to record performances to sequencers and play sounds through external sequencer sound modules The GUITAR TO MIDI function features system parameters whose settings affect the overall functionality of the device and patch parameters which are set on an individual patch basis Pitches output with GUITAR TO MIDI the MIDI Note messages are affected by the Channel A Alternate Tuning settings TUNING BEND HARMO and the D Beam ribbon controller settings T ARM The Channel B Alternate Tuning settings have no bearing on these output pitches Ifthe pitch output with GUITAR TO MIDI the MIDI Note messages
278. oFRONT B Switches the Channel B pickup towards the front PU SEL toREAR B Switches the Channel B pickup towards the rear FC 300 EXP3 CTL3 EXP4 CTL5 EXP5 CTL7 GK S1 S2 GK VOL EXP PEDAL FC 300 EXP1 EXP2 Parameter Explanation Parameters for which is indicated can be assigned to the control lers shown here OFF No function is assigned vv vv ASSIGNABLE Functions according to the vv wv wv PATCH Control Assign settings in each individual patch PATCH LEVEL Provides control of the patch W v 0 100 level PATCH LEVEL v v 0 200 AB BALANCE Provides control of the balance W v of the volume in Channel A and Channel B FOOT VOLUME simultaneous control W v A amp B of the foot volume in Channel A and Channel B FOOT VOLUME Provides control of the foot v v A volume in Channel A or Chan FOOT VOLUME nel P vi v B WAH Provides control of the pedal W v wah when the pedal wah is switched on GUITAR Provides simultaneous control W v VOLUME A amp B the COSM guitar volume in Channel A and Channel B GUITAR Provides control of the COSM v VOLUME A guitar volume in Channel A or GUITAR ChannelB v VOLUME Provides simultaneous control W v A amp B of the COSM guitar tone in Channel A and Channel B GUITAR TONE Provides control of the COSM v A guitar tone in Channel A or GUITAR TONE Channel B vi v B MIXER LEVEL Provides
279. of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensi tivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner In the interest of product improvement the specifications appearance of this unit and or contents of this package are subject to change without prior notice While under most conditions a computer similar to the above will permit normal operation of the VG 99 Roland cannot guarantee compatibility solely on these factors This is due to numerous variables that may influence the processing environment such as differences in mother board design and the particular combination of other devices involved Printing Conventions and icons in This Manual Indicate buttons WRITE WRITE button Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets Indicates information that you should be aware of when using the VG 99 Indicates supplementary information about an operation Indicates information about a convenient operation Indicates a reference page S Contents IMPORTANT NOTES xot 4 Main 11 Ultimate guitar modeling s
280. oller FILTER RIBBON FILTER Control of FILTER with the Ribbon controller RB POS RIBBON POS Ribbon controller position sensor RB ACT RIBBON ACT Ribbon controller touch sensor REAR PHHEL EF e Ee amp Controller screen Settings for the expression pedal EXP EXP PEDAL connected to the EXP PEDAL jack on the VG 99 s rear panel Settings for the footswitch connect CTL3 CTL3 ed to the CTL3 jack on the VG 99 s rear panel Settings for the footswitch connect CTL4 CTL4 ed to the CTL4 jack on the VG 99 s rear panel Displayed Controller screen Settings for the expression pedal 1 EXP1 on the FC 300 connected to the VG 99 Settings for the expression pedal EXPSW1 EXPSW1 switch 1 on the FC 300 connected to the VG 99 Settings for the expression pedal 2 EXP2 FC EXP2 on the FC 300 connected to the VG 99 Settings for the expression pedal EXSW2 FCEXPSW2 switch 2 on the FC 300 connected to the VG 99 Settings for the CTL1 on the FC 300 POCHI connected to the VG 99 CTL2 FC 2 Settings for the CTL2 on the FC 300 connected to the VG 99 Displayed Controller screen Settings for the expression pedal 3 or footswitch 3 connected to the FC 300 s rear panel Settings for the footswitch 4 con ema PERTE nected to the FC 300 s rear
281. ompatible device is controlled BCH Channel B of the V LINK compatible device is controlled CCH MIDI Note plug in is controlled 97 Chapter 8 Other Functions You can use the VG 99 while attached to a PDS 10 stand optional To prevent the PDS 10 stand from falling use the attached 1 Turn the VG 99 over and remove the screws cable ties to wind all cables around the stand as shown in from the bottom panel 2 Attach the mounting plate as shown in the figure using the screws removed in Step 1 or the knob nuts included with the kit Use the screws M5 x 10 included with the VG 99 to attach the PDS 10 mounting plate Use of other screws may damage the device internally or cause the unit to be inadequately secured When turning the unit over place some newspapers magazines or other such material under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons dials and other controls Also try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls are damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over When removing the screws be sure to keep them out of the reach of children to prevent smaller children from For instructions on how to assemble the PDS 10 and accidentally swallowing them attach the mounting plate refer to the Owner s Manual Take care not to allow hands and fingers to become that came with the PDS 10 pinche
282. on are switched This sets the Program Change messages transmitted when patches Parameter Range Explanation FC 300 CTL6 FC 300 external footswitch6 300 E5 C7 FC 300 external expression pedal5 external footswitch7 FC 300 CTL8 FC 300 external footswitch8 INTRNL PEDAL Internal pedal WAVE PEDAL Wave pedal TARGET Used in the motion dive tokyo performance package You can set different Program Changes in Channel A and Channel COLOR EQ FG Color foreground B The clips video images on the receiving device are switched by COLOR EQ BG Color background these Program Change messages SCRTCH SW Scratch switch A ch B ch PALETTE SPEED KNOB Speed knob OFF 1 32 This sets the Bank Select number CC 0 TOTAL FADER Total fader 32 55 Cross fader A ch B ch CLIP BPM SYNC BPM sync switch OFF 1 32 This sets the Program Change numbers CLIP LOOP Clip loop switch ASSIGN KNOB Assignable knob ASSIGN 1 2 FADE TIME Fade time switch ter VISUAL KNOB Visual plug in control knob ram Lf 1 Range Explanation AB SW A B switch TAP SW Tap switch These settings are necessary for controlling video using the guitar s performance data and messages from the VG 99 s cont
283. or the input sig nal from your guitar When the input signal level exceeds this threshold level limiting will be applied REL TYPE LIMITER 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the threshold until when limit ing is removed TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume OD DS Overdrive Distortion This effect distorts the sound to create long sustain It provides 30 types of distortion and custom settings Parameter Explanation OD DS SW OFF ON Turns the OD DS effect on off TYPE Selects the type of disto rtion BOOST This is a booster that works very well with COSM amps BLUES OD This is a crunch sound of the BOSS BD 2 CRUNCH A lustrous crunch sound with an added ele ment of amp distortion NATURAL OD This is an overdrive sound that provides distortion with a natural feeling TURBO OD This is the high gain overdrive sound of the BOSS OD 2 FAT OD This is a mellow overdrive sound OD 1 This is the sound of the BOSS OD 1 T SCREAM This models an Ibanez TS 808 WARM OD Overdrive with special mid range tone DIST This gives a basic traditional distortion sound MILD DS This is a distortion sound that provides a mild distortion DRIVE DS This is a powerful distortion sound RAT This models
284. or under the D Beam controller lights while the D Beam effect is being applied 77 Chapter 8 Other Functions 4 To turn off the D Beam controller press the button you pressed in Step 1 again so the indicator goes off Effective Range of the D Beam Controller The D Beam controller s effective range is shown in the figure below Moving your hand outside this effective range produces no effect Qo mA The effective range of the D Beam controller will be extremely limited when used under strong direct sunlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors NOTE The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the D Beam p 76 The parameter values set by holding your hand or other object over the D Beam controller change as shown below D BEAM vertical movements Explanation Closer to the D Beam The value approaches the MAX value Farther from the D Beam The value approaches the MIN value D BEAM horizontal Explanation movements To the right of the D The value approaches the MAX value Beam To the left of the D Beam The value approaches the MIN value 78 Adjusting the Ribbon Controller CALIBRATION While the ribbon controller has been adjusted at the factory for optimum performance the responsive range may vary with th
285. ou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen cf gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to ALTERNATE TUNING p 116 3 Select A or B with F2 A B or the F2 knob You cannot select this when LINK is on 4 Switch the function on or off with the F5 knob 5 Press F5 EDIT ALT TUNING E E 6 Set the pitches you want the strings to bend to with the F1 F6 knobs 7 Press PAGE gt to display Page 2 1721 8 Confirm the change in pitch with the 1 knob 9 With Control Assign set BEND as the target parameter for the pedal being used to control the pitch cf gt For detailed information on Control Assign refer to Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 27 Chapter 2 Creating Sounds Example of BEND Parameter Settings By making the parameter settings shown below you can achieve a string bender like effect which smoothly raises the pitch of the second string a whole step Values Set for the Alternate Tuning Parameter ALT TUNING AB LINK ON BEND SW ON BEND TUNING 1st EO BEND TUNING 2nd D 2 BEND TUNING 3rd GO BEND TUNING 4th D0 BEND TUNING 5th A 0 BEND TUNING 6th E 0 Values Set for the Control Assign Parameter CONTROL ASSIGN SOURCE FC 300 EXP 1 or RIBBON POS Set the RIBBON CONTROLLER s
286. ound TOCTAVE LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 This adds sound two octaves lower than the original sound DIRECT LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 Adjusts the level of the original sound POLY SG Poly Slow Gear This produces a volume swell effect violin like sound Parameter 5 Explanation Range RISE TIME 0 100 Adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum from the moment you begin picking SENS Sensitivity 0 100 Adjusts the sensitivity gt o 119 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide FX Effects COMP Compressor This is an effect that produces a long sustain by evening out the volume level of the input signal You can switch it to a limiter to suppress only the sound peaks and prevent distortion Parameter Explanation Range COMP SW OFF ON Turns the COMP effect on off TYPE Select the compressor type COMP The effect will function as a compressor LIMITR The effect will function as a limiter SUSTAIN TYPE COMP 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain ATTACK TYPE COMP 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are played Higher values result in s sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound THRSH TYPE LIMITER 0 100 Adjust this as appropriate f
287. ound more dis tinctive and unique TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0 100 This sets the sensitivity when the filter is shifted according to the picking The shift ing of the filter caused by the picking in creases as the value is raised When the value is set to 0 the filter remains set with no movement GLIDE SENS Glide Sensitivity Picking dynamics can affect the amount of pitch change over time This is known as the Glide effect With softly played notes for which no attack can be detected a glide effect may not be obtainable 0 100 This sets the sensitivity for the glide effect GLIDE TIME 0 100 This sets the speed of the glide Larger val ues result in longer glides GLIDE TIME is no longer applied once GLIDE SENS decreases SUSTAIN 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain 112 COSM GUITAR FILTER BASS Parameter Explanation Range FILTER CUTOFF 0 100 Adjusts the cutoff frequency setting the brightness hardness of the sound The sound gets brighter harder as the value is raised FILTER RESO Filter Resonance 0 100 Adjusts the resonance distinctiveness of the sound As the value is increased sounds in the frequency range near the cutoff frequen cy are boosted making the sound more dis tinctive and unique TOUCH SENS Touch Sensitivity 0
288. owels A E I O U are called out at random by adjusting the rate and depth VOWEL 1 A E 1 0 U Selects the first vowel VOWEL2 1 A E LO U Selects the second vowel SENS Sensitivity 2 0 100 Adjusts the sensitivity of the humanizer When it is set to a lower value no effect of the humanizer is obtained with weaker picking while stronger picking produces the effect When it is set to a higher value the effect of the humanizer can be obtained whether the picking is weak or strong RATE 0 100 Adjusts the cycle for changing the two vow BPM o BPM 2 els When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time MANUAL 3 0 100 This determines the point where the two vowels are switched When it is set to 50 vowel 1 and vowel 2 are switched in the same length of time When it is set to lower than 50 the time for vowel 1 is shorter When it is set to higher than 50 the time for vowel 1 is longer DEPTH 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume 1 Setting available with MODE set to PICK or AUTO 2 Setting available with MODE set to PICK 3
289. panel Settings for the expression pedal 4 E4 C5 FCE4 C5 or footswitch 5 connected to the FC 300 s rear panel Settings for the footswitch 6 con roe nected to the FC 300 s rear panel Settings for the expression pedal 5 E5 C7 FCE5 C7 or footswitch 7 connected to the FC 300 s rear panel CTL8 Settings for the footswitch 8 nected to the FC 300 s rear panel 83 Chapter 8 Other Functions CONTROL H Controller screen Settings for general purpose as ASGN 1 ASSIGN1 signs you can set freely as control lers for MIDI messages and other controllers in addition to those de scribed above ASGN16 ASSIGN16 Settings for the function knobs ar Pir ranged below the VG 99 s LCD DIRECT EDIT 3 Select the function you want to assign with PAGE lt gt F1 F6 and the 1 6 knobs lt i You can assign two different functions to one controller For example you can assign separate functions to the GK VOL 1 and GK VOL 2 displayed in the screen cf gt For more on PITCH and FILTER of the D BEAM controller refer to Controlling Sounds by Hand Motion or the Guitar Neck D Beam Controller p 77 For more on PITCH and FILTER of the Ribbon controller refer to Controlling the Sounds with the Movement of Your Fingertip Ribbon Controller p 79 The following section describes the parameters you can set
290. performance data for all of the strings is transmitted over the basic channel When set to MONO mode 1st string Transmitted over the basic channel 2nd string Transmitted over the channel number one higher than the basic channel 6th string Transmitted over the channel number five higher than the basic channel Lef gt For more details about the mode refer to Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 l Follow Steps 1 2 in Selecting the Controller Used to Control the Hold Function HOLD p 65 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen GTR TO HIDI HOLD BEND EAZIC Fo CTL CH MASE CTL ich 3 ZELECTNOFF OHNRZELECTOFF OH 2 Setthe channel with F3 SELECT or the F3 knob Preventing Transmission of Program Change Messages PC MASK You can prevent transmission of Program Change messages that can be set in Outputting Program Change Messages Simultaneously When Switching Patches PC p 70 This does not affect such Program Changes as those set in MIDI PC OUT p 60 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Selecting the Controller Used to Control the Hold Function HOLD CTL p 65 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen GTR TO HIDI HOLD Basic CTL CH MASE ich Tall On 9 0 3 ZELECTRNOFF OHBZELECTROFF OH 2 Setthe function to ON with F4 OFF ON or the F4 knob When PC MASK is set to ON the Program Change messages set w
291. ping of the audio signals If this occurs you can use any of the following methods to avoid the problem e Stop playback with the software or set Soft Thru to OFF e Switch off the software s audio input e Change the SYSTEM USB USB IN setting to OFF No stereo effect produced m Do you have a monaural effect or COSM amp connected after the stereo effect STRING PAN CHORUS etc Passing the signal through a monaural effect or COSM amp cancels the stereo effect Press CHAIN to confirm the effect connection sequence p 34 Cannot change parameters with knobs or PATCH VALUE dial Are you using INTERNAL PEDAL 155 with Control Assign When INTERNAL PEDAL or WAVE PEDAL is used for the assign source the effect parameters set as the assign targets change automatically If you want to change parameters with the knobs or PATCH VALUE dial first switch off Control Assign and cancel the INTERNAL PEDAL setting Is the source in Control Assign set to INPUT LEVEL p 155 When the assign source is set to INPUT LEVEL the effect parameters set as the assign targets automatically change according to the input level from the guitar the performance dynamics If you want to change parameters with the knobs or PATCH VALUE dial first switch off Control Assign 187 Chapter 10 Appendices Other Problems Unable to save SYSTEM USB USB IN settings Ifthe USB IN parameter is set to COSM GTR A CO
292. played The exchange destination patch number and name are indicated FAIA E gt AANGE 1 2 EXCHANGE 1 BO 15 Gui tar gmaizu mauitar YES CHRITEI HO CEIT 4 Use the PATCH VALUE dial to select the exchange destination patch 5 Press WRITE again The message NOW EXCHANGING is displayed as the current patch and the selected patch are exchanged and the VG 99 changes to the exchange destination patch number PHILA Er AANGE 1 21 EXCHANGING If you are not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen 87 Chapter 8 Other Functions Initializing User Patches PATCH INITIALIZE You can set user patches to their initial conditions with all effects switched off This is convenient when you want to create a patch from scratch You cannot initialize preset patches 1 Confirm that the Play screen for a user patch is displayed 2 Press WRITE 3 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 3 The PATCH INITIALIZE screen appears INITIALIZE WG tar YES CHRITEI HO INITIALIZE is displayed and the number and name of the patch to be initialized are indicated 4 Use the PATCH VALUE dial to select the patch you want to initialize 5 Press WRITE again The message NOW INITIALIZING is displayed as the VG 99 switches to the patch to be initialized then the Play screen returns MES gt AGE HOM IN
293. put to the effects POLY FX are not applied Parameter Explanation COSM GTR B The signals are connected at the point where the COSM GUITAR is output The audio output from the computer in stead of the COSM guitar sounds played by the connected guitar is input to the effects POLY FX are not applied NORMAL PU The signals are connected at the normal pickup input The audio output from the computer in stead of the normal sounds played by the connected guitar is input to the effects MAIN OUT The signals are connected at the point where MAIN OUT is output The signals from the VG 99 s MAIN OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed and output SUB OUT The signals are connected at the point where SUB OUT is output The signals from the VG 99 s SUB OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed and output MAIN amp SUB The signals are connected at the point where both MAIN OUT and SUB OUT are output Each of the signals from the VG 99 s MAIN OUT and the audio output from the com puter are mixed SUB OUT and the audio output from the computer are mixed from the output IN LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the volume level of the digital audio received via USB from the computer USB OUT This sets the point internally within the VG 99 from which signals are output via USB to the computer
294. r pickups or AC the POS setting will not be CENTER Use the center pickup available C F Use both front and center pickups a FRONT Use the front pickup o ALL Use all pickups VOL Volume 0 100 Sets the volume With a setting of 0 there will be no sound TONE 0 100 Adjusts the tone The standard value is 100 lowering the value creates a softer tone 103 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Parameter Range Explanation ANGLE 315 315mm This simulates the angle of the pickup rela tive to the strings The setting indicates the distance from the POS setting that the sixth string will be located With positive set tings the sixth string will be further from the bridge With negative values the sixth string will be closer to the bridge With a setting of 0 the pickup will be perpendic ular with the strings BRIDGE POSITION ANGLE If PIEZO or AC is selected as the pickup type the Angle setting will not be available Angle settings which would exceed the range of the Position setting 5 320 will have no effect For example if the Position is set to 100 mm and valid range of the Angle setting will be 95 220 mm COSM GUITAR E GTR Common Parameters Besides the other COSM E GTR parameters the VG 99 also includes the following shared parameters Parameter Range Explanation EQ Equalizer A four band equalizer with high and low ranges is provided The
295. range the param FC 300 CTL2 FC 300 control pedal2 eter changes FC 300 E3 C3 FC 300 external expression pedal3 external footswitch3 FC 300 CTL4 FC 300 external footswitch4 FC 300 E4 C5 FC 300 external expression pedal4 external footswitch5 174 SYSTEM Chapter 9 Parameter Guide Parameter Range Explanation TRIGGR 2 Sets the point at which the virtual expression pedal s action begins PATCH CHANGE Functions when patches are switched GK VOL Functions when the divided pickup s vol ume knob is adjusted GK 51 52 Functions when the divided pickup s DOWN S1 or UP S2 switch position is changed CTLI CTL4 Functions when the CTL 1 2 buttons or foot switch connected to CTL 3 4 jack are operat ed EXP Functions when the expression pedal con nected to EXP PEDAL jack are operated D BEAM V H Functions when the vertical or horizontal position is detected by the D Beam control ler RIBBON ACT POS Functions when the ribbon controller is op erated by touch or when the position is de tected FC 300 EXP1 EXP2 Functions when the FC 300 s EXP PEDAL 1 or 2 is operated FC 300 CTL1 CTL2 Functions when the FC 300 s CTL1 or CTL2 is operated FC 300 E3 C3 CTL4 E4 C5 CTL6 E5 C7 CTL8 Functions when a pedal connected to the FC 300 s E3 C3 CTL4 E4 C5 CTL6 E5 C7 or CTL8 jacks is operated TIME 2 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time for the virtual e
296. re not output if you continue to play the instrument with the Hold effect left on e HOLD3 The Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller If the Hold function remains on as you continue to play the strings Note On messages for strings other than the one already being held can be output but they are not held Outputting Control Changes by Operating the Controllers CC You can operate the panel knobs and pedals to output Control Change messages There are two different settings l Follow Steps 1 2 in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt 4 gt to display Page 2 GTR us PHICH A SRC GE VOL OFF 3 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob or F4 SELECT or the F4 knob to select the controller you want to set SRC Controller GK VOL GK 3 Volume knob GK S1 GK 3 DOWN S1 Switch GK S2 GK 3 UP S2 Switch CTL1 Control Button 1 CTL2 Control Button 2 EXP PEDAL External Expression Pedal CTL3 External Footswitch 3 CTL4 External Footswitch 4 D BEAM V D BEAM Height D BEAM H D BEAM Left Right RIBBON ACT Ribbon Controller Touch RIBBON POS Ribbon Controller Touch Position FC 300 FC 300 s EXP PEDAL 1 FC 300 EXPSW1 FC 300 s EXP PEDAL SW1 FC 300 EXP2 FC 300 s EXP PEDAL 2 300 EXPSW2 FC 300 s EXP PEDAL SW2 FC 300 CTL1 FC 300 s CTL1 FC 300 CTL2 FC
297. reating a richer sound Because of the need to analyze the pitch chords two or more sounds played simultaneously cannot be played Parameter Range Explanation RANGE This selects the register to which the effect is applied RANGE1 B1 corresponds to the sound of an open 7th string to E6 corresponds to the 1st string played at the 24th fret RANGE2 B1 corresponds to the sound of an open 7th string to E5 corresponds to the 1st string played at the 12th fret RANGE3 B1 corresponds to the sound of an open 7th string to E4 corresponds to the sound of an open 1st string RANGE4 B1 corresponds to the sound of an open 7th string to E3 corresponds to the 4th string played at the 2nd fret OCTAVE LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the sound one octave below DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 129 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide PITCH SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves Parameter Range Explanation VOICE Selects the number of voices for the pitch shift sound 1VOICE One voice pitch shifted sound output in monaural 2MONO Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output in monaural 2ST 2Stereo Two voice pitch shifted sound PS1 PS2 output through left and right channels LEVE
298. ression that is possible during performance MIDI provides for different types of MIDI messages MIDI messages can be categorized broadly into two groups messages handled on an individual MIDI channel basis Channel messages and those handled independently of MIDI channels System messages Channel Messages These are messages used for conveying the events that take place during performance Normally you can control most performances using only these messages The action controlled with each MIDI message is determined by the receiving device s settings Program Change Messages These message are generally used for switching sounds sounds are switched with Program Change numbers 1 128 Furthermore with the VG 99 you can also use Control Change Bank Select messages together with the Program Change messages allowing you to switch 400 different patch numbers Control Change Messages Control Change messages are used for enhancing performance expression Functions are distinguished from one another with Control numbers the particular functions that can be controlled varies with the MIDI device With the VG 99 you can control specified parameters Note On Messages These messages convey to the device the pitches and volumes at which sounds are played Note Off Messages These messages instruct the device to stop sounds currently being played Bend Messages These messages are sent to produce continuous changes in the pitch Syste
299. rings 1 6 normal pickup MAIN OUT and SUB OUT levels 1 tar GE SUE 1zT zHD RO TH STH FARAH 1EIFARAMZEIFARAMSEIFARAM4AIFARAMSEIFARAHE By assigning parameters to the F1 F6 knobs as described in Changing the Sounds with the Knobs as You Play DIRECT EDIT p 82 you can use them to control values while in the Play screen Additionally you can display a popup for the assigned parameters and their values by pressing the F1 F6 buttons About the Information in the Display Basic Operation Some screens may contain parameters spanning multiple pages The page number is indicated at the upper right of the screen COSM AMF COMBO ron BASS MIDDLE TREBLE RBS 116 43 44 5a ga a ah ah ah 1 Use PAGE lt gt to switch pages 2 Use F1 F6 or the F1 F6 knobs to change the values iR Pressing a FUNCTION button while SET appears in the lower part of the screen sets the corresponding function to the indicated value of GAIN BASS MIDDLE TREBLE MEg Lew 116 48 44 65 0 9 d ESE HEA ESE ESE EES ERU 19 Chapter 1 Outputting Sounds Adjusting the Volume Turn the OUTPUT LEVEL knob to set the volume to a suitable level VG 99 V Guitar System PATCH VALUE CATEGORY RIBBON CONTROLLER__ EXIT The output from the SUB OUT connector XLR type remains constant r
300. ristic buzz produced by the buzz bridge when the strings make contact with it ATTACK LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume level of the attack TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone of the body The standard value is 0 raising the value boosts the high range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the body With a set ting of 0 there will be no sound BANJO Parameter Explanation Range 0 100 Specifies the strength of the attack when you pluck the string strongly As this setting is increased the attack will be sharper and the sound will be crisper RESO Resonation 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation The resonation increases as the value is raised TONE 50 50 Adjusts the tone of the body standard value is 0 raising the value boosts the high range LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the body With a set ting of 0 there will be no sound 106 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide RESO Parameter Range Explanation SUSTAIN You can specify how the resulting volume will be affected by chang es loud soft dynamics in the guitar string vibrations that are input 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain RESO Resonation Parameter Explanation Range BODY 0 100 Adjusts the body resonation Raising th
301. rollers TOTAL SELECT Total select You can make up to two types of settings FX SELECT Effect select SOURCE PLAY POS Play position OFF The V LINK function is not assigned LOOP START Loop start position BEND Pitch bend messages LOOP END Loop end position VELO Velocity messages LAYER MODE Layer mode select GK VOL GK 3 GK volume knob DV 7PR 51 GK 3 51 switch 5 52 GK 3 UP S2 switch DISLV TIME Dissolve time Control button1 time elapsed in switching video images CTL2 Control button2 TBAR T bar EXP PEDAL Expression pedal connected to the EXP COLOR Cb Color cb Color difference signal PEDAL jack COLOR Cr Color cr Color difference signal CTL3 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 jack BRIGHTNESS Brightness jack tip 1 Visual effects1 CTL4 Footswitch connected to the CTL3 4 jack VFX 2 Visual effects jack ring VFX3 Visual effects3 D BEAM V D BEAM vertical movements H 4 Visual effects4 D BEAM H D BEAM horizontal movements OUTPUT FADE Output fade RIBBON RIBBON CONTROLLER Fe OEP DUAL STREAM Dual stream 300 expression peda DD MIN Minimum 1 FC 300 EXPSW1 FC 300 expression pedal switch1 FC 300 EXP2 FC 300 expression pedal 0 127 Sets the lower limit in the range the param 300 EXPSW2 FC 300 expression pedal switch2 i i p E MAX Maximum 1 FC 300 FC 300 control pedal1 TET cR ets the upper limit in the
302. s This features lets you make separate settings for the amount of bend for each individual string just as with a string bender or pedal steel guitar This is mainly used with Control Assign 12 STRING This changes the sound of a regular six string guitar to that of a twelve string guitar featuring secondary strings For each individual string you can set the shift in pitch for the secondary string relative to the respective main string the amount of delay and the volume DETUNE This allows you to subtly shift the pitch of each individual string When playing sounds from both COSM GUITAR A and B switching DETUNE to ON in one of the channels to slightly alter the pitch produces an effect resembling double tracking creating a sound with greater breadth and depth HARMONY This analyzes the pitch of each string and adjusts the amount of shift in the pitch to convert the pitches into harmonies matched to the key You can create and use the harmonies you like in each individual patch with the USER TYPE function With the GR 300 selected as the COSM guitar expression of sounds may become unstable when the Alternate Tuning 12STR is set to ON or when pitches are shifted excessively Parameter Explanation AB LINK OFF ON This setting switches the AB LINK on and off When AB LINK is on you can use the same settings for the functions below on both COSM GUITAR A and COSM GUITAR B
303. s been installed with the first string end sixth string end reversed Inputting the Guitar s Scale 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings Set the scale length the distance from the bridge to the nut p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 2 p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 3 Use F5 SELECT or the F5 knob to select the pickup direction 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Page 2 3 Use the F3 knob to set the scale length of the Settings Explanation guitar you are using Presets include 648 mm NORMAL The cable extends from the 6th string side ST and 628 mm LP Ordinarily you should use this setting REVRSE The cable extends from the 1st string side Settings Explanation 620 660 mm ST 648 mm Specifies the scale of your guitar LP 628 mm 43 Chapter 4 Global Device Settings SYSTEM Setting the DOWN S1 UP S2 Switch Arrangement On some guitars with the Divided pickup built in the positions of the DOWN S1 UP S2 switches are reversed from those of the Divided pickup Set this so that the functions match 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 2 Press PAGE gt to display Page 2 SYSTEM GE FU GUITAR TYFE SCALE ak FLI GK FU zziszz FHASE DIREC Fos HORHRL
304. s of whether DOWN S1 or UP S2 is pressed In this case the MODE setting is disabled 51 DEC S1 will decrease the value and 52 will in 2 INC crease it S1 INC S2 will decrease the value and S1 will in S2 DEC crease it S1 MIN The value will be at MIN when S1 is 52 MAX pressed The value will be at MAX when S2 is pressed 51 MAX The value will be at MAX when S1 is 52 MIN pressed The value will be at MIN when S2 is pressed MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide PANEL CTL1 CTL2 Control Button 1 2 Parameter Explanation Range SW Switch OFF ON This setting switches CONTROL button on and off TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER MAX Maximum This sets the maximum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER While you can set two different target parameters each to CTL1 and CTL2 the CTL2 buttons light when the value set in MAX for the first parameter set to either one is reached SW MODE Switch Mode This sets the behavior of the value each time the switch is operated MOMENT The setting is normally OFF
305. s operated TIME 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time for the internal pedal to shift from the fully released posi tion pedal toe raised to the fully depressed position pedal toe pressed down 1 Parameter Range Explanation CURVE This selects one of the three types that determines how the internal pedal should change 1 LINEAR SLOW RISE FAST RISE RATE 0 100 This determines the time spend for one cycle of the wave pedal 2 FORM This selects one of the three types that determines how the wave pedal should change 2 SAW TRI SIN INPUT SENS 0 100 This adjusts the input sensitivity when IN PUT LEVEL is selected for SOURCE 3 1 TRIGGR TIME and CURVE parameters are enabled when the SOURCE parameter is set to INT PEDAL 2 RATE and FORM parameters are enabled when the SOURCE parameter is set to WAVE PEDAL 3 The INPUT SENS parameter is enabled when the SOURCE parameter is set to INPUT LEVEL DIRECT EDIT F1 F6 Parameter Range Explanation This assigns functions to the function buttons operable in the Play screen and the F1 F6 or F1 F6 knobs TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER p 157 156 MASTER Chapter 9 Parameter Guide TARGET PARAMETER Parameter F4 Parameter F5 Parameter F6 KEY BPM AMPCTL KEY BPM BPM TAP
306. s the timing at which patches are switched when you press V 1 pedals on the FC 300 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 Ex MODE CHANGE TUNER rr 300 E i a 4 Set BANK CHANGE with F2 SELECT or with the F2 knob Available Description Settings IMMEDIATE The patch changes immediately when the FC 300 s v 1 pedals pressed WAIT NUM Even after the FC 300 s y 1 4 pedals are pressed the patch does not change until the NUM BER is set Activating the VG 99 s Tuner from the 300 QUICK TUNER You can use the FC 300 s number pedals to switch the Tuner function on and off The Quick Tuner function is enabled only in the Play screen The Quick Tuner function is enabled only when the FC 300 s MODE is set to SYS EX 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 3 Press F5 FC 300 4 Set QUICK TUNER with F3 SELECT or with the F3 knob Available Settings Description OFF The QUICK TUNER function is not opera tional ON The QUICK TUNER function is operational The TUNER function is alternately switched on and off each time the currently selected number pedal is pressed 53 Chapter 5 Using the VG 99 in Combination with 300 Setting the FC 300 Amp Control This switches the FC 300 s AMP CTL 1 and AMP CTL 2 parameters on a
307. s those FC 300 CTL1 FC 300 control pedal described in CTL3 CTL4 Control3 Control4 p 154 FC 300 CTL2 FC 300 control pedal2 FC 300 FC 300 external expression pedal3 external footswitch3 FC 300 CTL4 FC 300 external footswitch4 FC 300 E4 C5 FC 300 external expression pedal4 external footswitch5 FC 300 CTL6 FC 300 external footswitch6 FC 300 E5 C7 FC 300 external expression pedal5 external footswitch7 FC 300 CTL8 FC 300 external footswitch8 INTRNL PEDAL Internal pedal WAVE PEDAL Wave pedal INPUT LEVEL Input level CC Control change SW Switch A OFF ON This setting switches the VG 99 s and FC 30075 controllers on and off cs TARGET PARAMETER This selects the parameter to be changed Refer to TARGET PARAMETER 157 MIN Minimum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER 155 Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MASTER Parameter Range Explanation MAX Maximum This sets the minimum value for the range in which the parameter can change The value differs depending on the parameter assigned for TARGET PARAMETER SW MODE Switch Mode This sets the behavior of the value each time the switch is operated MOMENT The setting is normally OFF minimum val ue switching to ON maximum value while the footswitch is held down LATCH The setting alternately switches to OF
308. se Page 3 6 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select FAVORITE WRITE ERIFX COMP 1 COMP Bi UR 7 Rotate 2 SELECT to select the Favorite Settings you want to search for 8 Press F3 SEARCH Osh GTR SEARCH Luz THis FAVORITE L CURRENT FATCH euaizitu mustarm A list of patches using the selected Favorite Setting is displayed 94 Chapter 8 Other Functions 9 You scroll through the list using F3 and F4 or the F3 and F4 knobs 10 Press F5 EXIT The list disappears from the screen 11 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Activating the Virtual Expression Pedal at the Start of Operations Internal Pedal System The VG 99 features a function called Internal Pedal system This function assigns specified parameters to a virtual expression pedal the internal pedal providing an effect automatically that changes volume and tone in real time just the way an expression pedal functions The Internal Pedal system features the following two functions allowing you to set Source for each assign 1 16 of the Assign e Internal Pedal Wave Pedal When the Internal Pedal or the Wave Pedal is used set the ASSIGN SW MODE to MOMENT Internal Pedal With the trigger you have set the assumed expression pedal starts working If you have set INTERNAL PEDAL to SOURCE set the TRIGGR parameter p 156 Wave Pedal This changes the
309. set according Common VIB Vibrato 133 to the value of the BPM 163 specified for each patch This makes SLICER Slicer p 134 to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the NIZER Humani et nem If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable SLOW GEAR Slow Gear 135 settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that DEFRET Defretter p 135 time FEEDBACKER Feedbacker p 135 DEPTH RING MOR Ring Modulator p 136 0 100 Determines the depth of the rotation effect ANTI FB Anti Feedback p 136 MANUAL ADV COMP Advanced Compressor p 136 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency of the rotation LIMITR Limiter p 137 effect SUB EQ Sub Equalizer p 137 RESO Resonanc e SUB DELAY Sub Delay p 138 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feed back Parameter Explanation Increasing the value will emphasize the ef fect creating a more unusual sound MOD1 SW MOD2 SW MODE Switch STEP RATE OFF ON Turns the MOD 1 MOD 2 effect on off Off 0 100 This sets the cycle of the step function that MOD 1 TYPE MOD 2 TYPE MODE Type BPM o BPM changes the rotation When it is set to a higher value the change will be finer Set pe gneve selects theeffectto this to Off when not using the Step function 12 N Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide FLANGER The flanging effect gives a twisting jet airplane li
310. set this to 100 MULTI MODE SINGLE MODE Parameter Explanation 435 445 2 This sets the reference pitch MUTE This setting selects whether or not the tuning sound is output from the connected device such as an amp OFF The tuning sound is not output ON The tuning sound is output 178 Chapter 10 Appendices MIDI Implementation Chart V Guitar System Date May 31 2007 Model VG 99 MIDI mpiemematon Chart Main Section Version 1 00 Basic Default Memorized Channel Changed Default Messages Altered Note Number True Voice Velocity Note ON Note OFF Pitch Bend Control Bank Select Change Program Change System Exclusive Common Song Position Song Select Tune Request System Clock Realtime Commands AUX Local ON OFF Messages All Notes OFF All Sound OFF Reset All Controller Active Sense System Reset Notes 1 O X is selectable 2 MIDI START STOP can be set with SYSTEM CONTROL ASSIGN Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO o Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 179 Chapter 10 Appendices V Guitar System Date May 31 2007 Model vG 99 MIDI Hnplementation Chart GUITAR TOI MIDI Section Version 1 00 1 11 x Memorized 1 11 Default Channel Changed Default Messages Altered True Voice Velocity Note ON Note OFF Pitch Bend Control Change
311. sing MIDI MIDI PC OUT This setting determines whether or not Program Change messages are output when the VG 99 s patches are switched 2 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen Press PAGE 4 gt to display Page 5 SYSTEM DIDI Rx PC OUT Ec Har 3 FIS FIS Set PC OUT ON OFF with F1 or the F1 knob When outputting Program Change messages the VG 99 simultaneously outputs MIDI Bank Select messages TX PC MAP TRANSMIT PROGRAM CHANGE MAP This setting determines the sequence of Program Change messages output when the VG 99 s patches are changed You can select whether to output Program Change messages set for the patches in advance or the Program Change messages programmed in each patch 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Setting the MIDI Related Functions p 58 to display the MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to display Page 5 SYSTEM DIDI TX RX PC OUT Mar ec FIK FIK 3 Use F2 or the F2 knob to set whether or not the Transmit Program channel is used OWEN Le Description Settings Regardless of the patch settings Program Change FIX messages predetermined for each patch number are output PROG The Program Change messages programmed in each patch are output The table below shows the correspondence between the patches and Program Change messages when TX PC MAP is
312. sound processed by the effect can be boosted by frequency range be fore it is output EQ SW Equalizer Switch OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the low middle frequency range tone PHASE HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency When pickups FRONT and REAR are mixed this setting determines the phase of pickup REAR relative to pickup FRONT This is valid only when two pickups are being used The phase setting that is part of the pickup FRONT parameters is the same as the corresponding parameter for pickup REAR Modifying one of them will cause the other parameter to change correspondingly 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q High Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area
313. sound that is mixed using the BALANCE knob is the sound processed from the beginning of the effects chain 1 Press CHAIN Using this function you can combine the following two methods to create sounds Sounds that include COMPRESSOR WAH AMP etc with the normal pickup sound 2 Use F2 SEL and F3 SEL to select the arrow indicating the connection point sounds that have only spaclal effects applied to the COSM section s synthesizer 3 Use F4 MOVE and F5 gt to shift or other source the COSM guitar s connection point When the volume of 1 above is to be controlled independently the level of effects before the COSM guitar should be assigned to the volume control of the GK 3 or to a similar controller perform the Write procedure p 38 p 82 Ifyou do not need to save the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen qin If you want to use only the normal pickup sound without using the COSM GUITAR or POLY FX set the COSM guitar as shown below 4 If you want to save the edited settings COSM GTR SW ON MIX LEVEL COSM GUITAR 0 NORMAL PU 100 Mixing Two Tones MIXER Setting the Mix Balance cf gt You can set the balance in the mix of Channel A and Channel B with the BALANCE knob 5 fter the knob is t the bal 1 For detailed about the block diagram refer to Signal i idR RE Me Flow p 183
314. st sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 0 100 Adjusts the feedback amount of the pitch shift sound 1 With VOICE set to 2MONO or 2ST you can select two sounds 130 FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide HARM1 HARM2 Harmony 1 This determines the pitch of the sound added to the input sound when you are making a harmony When HARM is set to any value from 2oct to 2oct and the harmony does not sound the way you intend use a User scale You can set the corresponding pitches to be output for each input pitch 2 2 oct It allows you to set it by up to 2 octaves USER higher or lower than the input sound When the scale is set to USER this parameter sets the user scale number to be used PRE DELAY1 PRE DELAY2 1 0 ms 300 ms Adjusts the time from when the direct BPM BPM J sound is heard until the harmonist sounds are heard Normally you can leave this set at Oms 1 Set HARMI or HARM2 to USER in the Harmonist screen 2 Select VOICE1 INTERVAL or VOICE2 INTERVAL with PAGE p The Voice Interval screen appears When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song 3 1 F1 F6 and
315. sted and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interf
316. strings Nylon String Guitar SITAR This is the sound of a Coral electric sitar The settings adjust the sitar s characteristic buzzing sound and tone BANJO This models a general banjo strung with five strings RESO Resonator This models a Dobro type resonator guitar VARI Variable Guitar This lets you make settings for the pickup body and the pitch of each string to specify the sound of the guitar BASS Bass Guitar p 109 Parameter Explanation JB Jazz Bass The sound of a Fender Jazz Bass PB Precision Bass The sound of a Fender Precision Bass SYNTH Synthesizer p 110 Parameter Explanation Range GR 300 This models the Roland GR 300 the famed analog polyphonic guitar synthesizer of yesteryear With the HEXA DISTORTION effect and pitch shifting six string sawtooth wave generation from the instrument s HEXA VCO and VCF variable frequency filter brings out all the nuance from guitar performance yet with the tone of an analog synthesizer BOWED This Instrument represents stringed musical instruments played with a bow DUAL This Instrument takes the string vibration that is input and adds both distortion and portions which have the pitch glid ed FILTER BASS This Instrument is like a bass whose sound is passed through a filter PIPE This Instrument produces sounds like a soft woodwind lead instrument SOLO This is a soft lead Instrument PWM Puls
317. sts the low middle frequency range tone HIGH MID FREQ High Middle Frequency 0 100 Adjusts the amount of time from the point at which application of the noise suppressor begins to when the volume is fully attenuat ed 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the HIGH MID GAIN HIGH MID Q Hi gh Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the HIGH MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area HIGH MID GAIN High Middle Gain 12 12dB Adjusts the high middle frequency range tone Parameter Explanation STRING PAN Tst th 100 0 100 0 This sets the left right pan of each string You cannot adjust the STRING PAN parameter when AC TYPE is set to STEEL The pan effect is cancelled if a monaural effect or COSM amp is connected after the COSM GUITAR effect STRING LEVEL 1st 6th 0 100 Specifies the output level of each string 108 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide BASS Common Parameters Besides the other COSM BASS parameters the VG 99 also includes BASS Bass Guitar Setting the parameter of bass guitar the following shared parameters Parameter Explan
318. t to display Page 3 or 4 HISER E EG SWH TOTAL maio z 3 2 3 Switch the EQ on or off with F1 ON OFF Page 3 4 Set the tonal quality with F1 F6 or with the 1 6 knobs 5 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen Lef gt For detailed information on all the parameters refer to TOTAL EQ p 146 Naming Patch PATCH Setting the Output Signal and Level OUTPUT This sets the signals and levels output for each of the VG 99 s output jacks and connectors 1 Press MIXER 2 Press PAGE gt to display Page 5 HIKER OuT SUE D OUT EVEL LeveL D OUT LeveL MATH HISER ima 166 ot ima 09 9 9 9 Ei E MATH SUB L 3 Set the signal and level output to MAIN OUT SUB OUT and DIGITAL OUT with F1 F6 or with the F1 F6 knobs cf gt For detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to OUTPUT p 147 4 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Tf not saving the settings press EXIT to return to the Play screen You can also set the output signal and level for the entire system Press SYSTEM Press PAGE lt gt to display Page 2 Press F1 Set the OUTPUT MODE parameter to SYSTEM with
319. t also allows you to control the VG 99 using MIDI messages Switching the Driver Mode 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE 4 gt to go to Page 2 SYSTEM CATEGORY NAME MISC VLIE CP AECOER OUTFUT V LINKECATGRY HMIZzCc 3 Press F2 USB 4 Press PAGE gt to go to Page 2 EE E az DRIVER HOH DIRECT HODE CHD MOH ADUAHC DISHEL OFF 00 14 04 ELECTIOFF 5 Setthe DRIVER MODE with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob Setting Explanation STNDRD due mode uses the OS s standard USB driv This mode uses the dedicated driver con ADVANG tained on the CD ROM When using VG 99 Editor Librarian set this to ADVANC The message PLEASE RESTART appears when DRIVER MODE is switched 6 Press EXIT one or more times to return to the Play screen Ifyou have not yet installed the driver for the mode you have set turn off the power to the VG 99 in this condition and install the driver 7 Quit all sequencer software and other applications on the computer that are using the VG 99 8 on the power to the VG 99 again The functions of a mode won t become available until after the power has been turned off then on again About MIDI in Standard Driver Mode You cannot use MIDI when STNDRD is selected as the driver mode If you want to use MIDI with the USB connection set the VG 99 to the advanced driver mode 72 Chapter 7 Using the VG 9
320. t force the unit s power supply cord to S share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a S level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result N CAUTION The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation adaptor RAD 99 or Stand PDS 10 Use with other rack mount adaptors or stands are capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury This VG 99 for use only with Roland rack mount e Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit A CAUTION e At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe Qo all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power p
321. t guitar and when the divided pickup height is changed Once the settings are completed properly they are saved when the power is turned off Afterwards you need not make the settings each time you play the instrument cf gt For more information on other parameters in the GK Settings refer to GK SETTING p 166 Tuning the Guitar TUNER Tune the guitar using the VG 99 s tuner function To get the best tone quality from the VG 99 make sure the tuning is accurate 999999 4 PAGE ASSIGNABLE DELAY 9 REVERE DYNAMIC CHAIN Em SYSTEM RIBBON CO FILTER CONTROL ASSIGN PATCH BALANCE LEVEL GLOBAL Kev BPM Em 1 Press TUNER The tuner function is switched on 2 Set the following with the PAGE lt gt buttons TUNER Explanation MULTI MODE You can play and tune six strings simulta neously SINGLE MODE You can play one individual string to tune that string 3 Press the function button F5 F6 corresponding to the function you want to set then rotate the knobs to select the value for the setting If you do not want to change these settings proceed to Step 4 F5 PITCH 435 Hz 445 Hz This sets the reference pitch With the factory settings this is set to 440 Hz This reference pitch is referenced by effects controlled by the KEY parameter What is the Reference Pitch This is the frequency
322. t the changed pitch expressing the pitch changes only in semitones However instead of reflecting the attenua tion of the string vibration the retriggered sound is the same as that when the string was initially played HOLD TYPE This selects the way the Hold function works HOLD1 Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller If the Hold function remains on as you con tinue to play the strings each successive Note On message is held and when a Note message is already being played from the same string the previous Note message is cancelled and the next Note On message is held This al lows you to prevent any interruption in the sounds even sounds from releasing the strings over the frets HOLD2 Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller However subsequent Note On messages are not output if you continue to play the in strument with the Hold effect left on HOLD3 Note On messages are held when the Hold function is switched on with the controller If the Hold function remains on as you contin ue to play the strings Note On messages for strings other than the one already being held can be output but they are not held GUITAR MIDI Parameter Range Explanation CC Control Change You can output the actions of the controllers specified with SRC as Control Change messages You can make two types of
323. t to FLAT the high cut filter is off or has no effect EFFECT LEVEL 0 120 Adjusts the volume of the delay sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound FX Effects PAN Parameter Range Explanation TAP TIME 1 0 100 Adjusts the delay time of the left channel de lay This setting adjusts the L channel delay time relative to the R channel delay time considered as 100 DUAL S DUAL P DUAL L R Parameter Range Explanation DELAY1 TIME 1 ms 900 ms BPM BPM o This determines the delay time When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time After setting DELAY TIME to BPM o if you tap F1 TAP the BPM value will change to match the timing of your tapping DELAY 1 FEEDBACK 0 100 Adjusts the amount of feedback of the Delay1 A higher value will increase the number of the delay repeats DELAY HI CUT Delay 1 High Cut Filter 700 Hz 11 kHz FLAT This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter of the Delay1 begins to take effect When it is set to FLAT the high
324. tch as with a Tremolo Arm 42 4 0000 80 Adding Nuance to the Sound FILTER eese 81 Changing the Sounds with the Knobs as You Play DIRECT EDIT see 82 Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN 82 One Touch Call Up of Favorite Patches DIRECT 200 86 Setting DIRECT PATCH a cip 86 Managing the Patches nesies iep aTa t perte Aa re oed ge 87 Copying the Current Patch to a Different Patch PATCH 87 Exchanging the Current Patch with a Different Patch PATCH EXCHANGE 122222222 87 Initializing User Patches PATCH INITIALIZE eee nnn nnns 88 Copying Settings Between Channel and Channel A B 88 Exchanging the Channel and Channel B Settings A B 88 Partially Copying Parameters in a Different Patch MODULE COPY 89 Partially Initializing Patch Parameters MODULE INITIALIZE eee 89 Separating Patches into Groups nennen nennen 90 Using CATEGORY to Call Up 90 Setting Patch see ete hee eie t
325. te sounds simply by combining these settings Furthermore creating patches using the Favorite Settings vastly simplifies editing when multiple similar tones are used For example if you beforehand select the same Favorite Settings for a multiple number of patches you ll later be able to implement changes in all those patches at once simply by editing the Favorite settings 91 Chapter 8 Other Functions Calling Up Favorite Settings Here is an example using the compressor effect 1 Press FX 2 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 COP 00 05 WAH 4 Press PAGE gt to display the last page this case Page 3 5 Use F1 SELECT or the F1 knob to select FAVORITE The Favorite Settings selection screen appears CAIFA COMP i NOT USED SELECT CANCELL OK 6 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob to select your preferred setting 7 When you have made your choice press F6 OK to cancel the procedure press F5 CANCEL or press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 8 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen Changing Tone Settings This procedure changes the tones in patches using the Favorite Settings The method below can also be used to edit the Favorite Settings themselves Here is an example using the compressor effect l Press FX 2 Press P
326. the built in speaker of the amp you selected with PREAMP TYPE 1x15 Models the Trace Elliot 1518 1x18 Models the SWR Big Ben 2x15 Models the Acoustic 402 4x10 Models the SWR Goliath 8x10 Models the Ampeg 810E MIC POS Mic Position This simulates the microphone position CENTER Simulates the condition that the micro phone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10cm Simulates the condition that the micro phone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone e MIC LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Zs DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound 145 Chapter 9 Parameter Guide MIXER MIXER This mixes the signals in Channel A and Channel B MIXER A B MIXER CHANNEL A B Parameter Explanation Range MIX SW OFF ON This setting switches mixing of Channel A or Channel B on and off The sounds in the respective channel are not mixed when this is set to OFF PAN 100 0 0 100 This sets the panning for Channel A or Channel B LEVEL 0 100 This sets the Channel A or Channel B vol ume level DELAY A SEND DELAY B SEND 0 100 Adjusts the send level from Channel A or Channel B to the mixer s delay REVERB A SEND REVERB B SEND 0 100 Adjusts the send level from Channel A or Channel B to the mixer s reverb CH DELAY Channel Delay 0 50ms Adjusts the time that
327. the output of sounds from weaker picking This setting allows you to prevent undesired sounds produced when playing rhythm or due to incidental contact with strings from incorrect picking Changing the Pitch in Semitone Units CHROMATIC When using string bending or other such techniques to gradually change the pitch with the guitar or bass you can set the VG 99 so that the pitch of the MIDI messages being output changes in semitone increments 1 Follow Steps 1 2 in Setting the Transmission Mode MODE p 67 to display the GTR TO MIDI screen 2 Press PAGE lt to display Page 1 TO FE FLAY CHRO HOLD MODE FEEL MATIC TYFE HOMO FEELi1 OFF HOLT 8 3 Adjust the setting with SELECT or the knob e OFF Normal Pitch Bend messages are output The pitch varies continuously in keeping with the string bending or vibrato e TYPE1 When the pitch changes this setting applies the results of the pitch change information without stopping the note that is playing This produces a unique effect whereby there is no attack sound when the pitches change similar to slurring on a recorder e TYPE2 When the pitch changes the 99 retriggers replays the sound at the changed pitch producing pitch changes only at the semitone increments As a result the attack sound plays each time the pitch changes The attenuation of the string vibration following the moment the string is played is reflecte
328. the overall sound in Channel A or B is delayed Although this is normally set to 0 ms you can produce greater breadth along witha chorus effect by setting a difference in the time the sounds are played relative to the sounds from Channel B PATCH LEVEL Parameter E Explanation BAL Balance A0 100B A100 0B Adjusts the volume balance of Channel A and Channel B You can set this parameter in the Mixer screen or with the BALANCE knob This parameter is disabled when DYNAM IC is on PATCH LEVEL 0 200 Adjusts the overall patch volume 146 TOTAL EQ This adjusts the tone of the mixed signals from Channel A and Channel B Parametric EQ is used for the low middle and high middle frequency ranges Parameter SW Equalizer Switch Explanation OFF ON Turns the EQ effect on off TOTAL GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the volume before the equalizer LOW GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the low frequency range tone HIGH GAIN 12 12dB Adjusts the high frequency range tone LOW MID FREQ Low Middle Frequency 20Hz 10 0kHz Specifies the center of the frequency range that will be adjusted by the LOW MID GAIN LOW MID Q Low Middle Q 0 5 16 Adjusts the width of the area affected by the EQ centered at the LOW MID FREQ Higher values will narrow the area LOW MID GAIN Low Middle Gain 12 1
329. the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on a another MIDI device e g a sequencer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a sequencer Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnect
330. this setting when switching among multi ple guitars as you perform Determining the Function of the GK Volume Control and DOWN S1 UP S2 Switches GK FUNC This sets the function for the GK 3 s GK Volume and DOWN SI UP S2 switches 1 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen 2 Press PAGE 4 to display Page 1 3 Press F2 GKFUNC GE FATCH GE VOL ASS IGHMAELE FATCH 4 Setthe parameter you want to assign with F1 SELECT F6 SELECT or the F1 F6 knob cf gt For detailed information on the parameters that can be assigned refer to GK VOL GK Volume p 166 and GK S1 S2 GK S1 S2 Switch p 166 When assigning functions to each patch for DOWN S1 and UP S2 set Control Assign to ASSIGNABLE PATCH With other settings the assignment settings in the patches are disregarded This is the same setting as that set with GK VOL or GK S1 S2 in SYSTEM CTL Adjusting Overall Tone According to the Environment GLOBAL OUTPUT SELECT The VG 99 includes a function for adjusting the overall tone produced by the device This is referred to as the Global function You can use the Global function to adjust the overall sound of the VG 99 to suit the equipment being used or environment you are in without altering the individual patches e e Selecting the Settings 99 can store
331. tring with the maximum force you d use in an actual performance and set the sensitivity such that the meter registers a level just before reaching the maximum level If the large segments at the right end of the level meter appear it means the level is set too high Lower the sensitivity setting Pressing F1 F6 initializes each string s value to 65 Depending on the guitar you use the level meter may move to the maximum level even when the sensitivity is set to the minimum setting If this occurs adjust the clearance separating the divided pickup and the strings so the distance is slightly greater than specified Play the sixth through first strings with the normal amount of force if any strings sounds particularly loud lower the sensitivity setting for that string and keep adjusting until the differences in the strings volume levels are minimal Settings Explanation Adjust the input sensitivity of each Di 0 100 vided pickup Setting Whether or Not the Deviced Pickup Is Used GK CONNCT The VG 99 comes equipped with a function that automatically determines whether or not a GK connection exists and switches the internal settings accordingly This makes it possible for you to all functions other than a COSM guitar COSM amp effects tuner etc when you ve connected only to the GUITAR INPUT 2 Follow Steps 1 3 in Selecting the Settings p 42 to display the GK SETTING screen Press PAG
332. trol method ON When connected to the VG 99 the FC 300 automatically changes to System Exclusive mode and operates in accordance with the settings made with the VG 99 This is the setting you should normally select You can control the FC 300 even without matching the VG 99 s and FC 300 s Device IDs OFF Select OFF when controlling the FC 300 s with the FC 300 manually Explanation BANK CHANGE This sets the timing with which tones switch when patches are changed with the FC 300 IMMEDIATE The tone changes immediately when the FC 300s V A pedals are pressed WAIT NUM Even after the FC 300 s V A pedals are pressed the tone does not change until the NUMBER is set QUICK TUNER This enables use of the FC 300 s number pedals to switch the Tuner function on and off The Quick Tuner function is enabled only when the FC 300 s MODE is set to SYS EX OFF The QUICK TUNER function is not opera tional ON The QUICK TUNER function is operational The TUNER function is alternately switched on and off each time the currently selected number pedal is pressed 169 Q 9 17 Chapter 9 Parameter Guide SYSTEM MIDI Parameter Explanation Parameter Explanation MIDI OUT This sets the routing of signals at the MIDI OUT connector MIDI CH MIDI Channel OFF Signals are not output from M
333. tton iniii ninina a nnne 13 TUNING a Sri P ne ec 26 27 116 a ete ard n e s 129 TW CLEAN ts ette et cte 140 141 TX PG catu tu 163 TX PCM AP eie irt n deeds 60 171 TX PGSTRING 1 6 sese 165 TYPES SR Ems 103 116 118 120 122 126 127 136 137 148 149 151 153 U UINISV i c teet cots tects ar te et EP ett 127 133 UPPER BALD enn 149 sies di hd 149 UPPERRNG 1 149 asta e tette en maid 71 173 USB MIDI natia gno e eee 170 USB MIDYI ZE etie ene co ei 170 USB Connectoren aane 14 USB Driv et edie das Stier RAs hee ee Ss Bocas 71 5 2 ses en BP 73 173 USB 73 173 USER INTERVAL 7 0 117 User Patches n eee ns 23 User Sc le 5 eiue ineat 117 131 USER TUNING nit degere ode RS 29 USER TUNING 16 117 MARIA dingue NM EI 103 107 NG 99 EGltOE vr Tree 72 VG 99 Librarian esee 72 VG 99 Software System Requirements 185 MIB ut 127 133 VIB DEPTH tette eere 135 135 VIBRATO Jen 111 133 MLIN K e eR th cee Senet RC 11 96 174 V LINK Button ei onai ai ea 13 V LINKPATCH ees 174 N EINK SYSTEM ante ehe et 176 Eos Stet s ENDE ture EIE 130 VOIC
334. tton to use T ARM which changes the pitch of the COSM guitar like a tremolo arm 1 Press CONTROL ASSIGN 2 Press PAGE lt gt to go to Page 2 for the D Beam or Page 3 for the ribbon controller 3 Press F1 PITCH 4 Press PAGE lt to go to Page 1 5 Select T ARM with F1 SELECT or the F1 knob The D BEAM T ARM or the RIBBON T ARM screen appears This step is not necessary if you are using the ribbon controller In this case proceed to Step 5 COMTROL FITCH T ARH DOW DOW TYPE MIM A B 5 g T ARM TypE 6 Use F2 SELECT or the F2 knob in the D Beam screen or F1 SELECT or the F1 knob in the Ribbon Controller screen to select the channel to which you want to apply the effect 7 Seteach of the T ARM parameters on Page 1 or 2 cf gt For more detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to PITCH p 151 p 153 8 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen 9 Press the D BEAM or RIBBON CONTROLLER PITCH button causing the indicator to light 10 Use the D Beam or ribbon controller like tremolo arm to change the pitch With D BEAM T ARM SW or RIBBON T ARM SW and BEAM T ARM CONTROL and RIBBON T ARM CONTROL set as the target in Control Assign you can control the T ARM effect using an external pedal MIDI device or any of a variety of other controllers Chapter 8 Other Funct
335. u may be unable to properly obtain the foot volume effect if FEEDBACKER p 135 is connected at a point after FV in the effects chain p 32 Q gt o 139 Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM AMP COSM technology simu speaker sizes and cabinet shapes You can make separa lates different preamp characteristics te settings for Channel A and Channel B Parameter Explanation Range COSM AMP SW COSM AMP Switch OFF ON Turns the COSM AMP effect on off PREAMP TYPE refer to Preamp Type This sets the type of the guitar preamp List Preamp Type List Type Explanation BG LEAD p 141 BG LEAD This models the lead sound of the MESA Boogie combo amp BG DRIVE This models a MESA Boogie with TREBLE SHIFT SW on BG RHYTHM This models the rhythm channel of a MESA Boogie SMOOTH DRIVE This is a smooth drive sound MILD DRIVE This is a mellow drive sound MS STACK 141 1 651959 1 This models the sound input to Input Iona Marshall 1959 MS1959 II This models the sound input to Input II on a Marshall 1959 MS1959 I II This models the sound of a Marshall 1959 with Inputs I and II connected in parallel Type Explanation JC CLEAN p 141 JC 120 This is the sound of the Roland JC 120 WARM CLEAN This g
336. u want to change 6 Press PAGE lt gt to move the cursor to the position with the character you want to change 7 Selectthe character with the PATCH VALUE dial As you continue to rotate the PATCH VALUE dial the character guide automatically switches from uppercase letters to lowercase letters numerals and symbols You can carry out the following operations by pressing F1 F6 Buttons Functions F1 INSERT Inserts a blank space at the cursor position F2 DELETE Deletes the character and shifts the follow ing characters to the left F3 SPACE F4 A0 Enters a blank space at the cursor position Switches between letters numerals and symbols Switches between uppercase and lowercase letters F5 A lt gt a F6 CATGRY Select the user category you want to name 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to complete the category name 9 Press EXIT several times to return to the Play screen Category names are system parameters They are saved at the time they are entered even without the Write procedure Storing Your Preferred Settings Individually FAVORITE SETTINGS What are Favorite Settings The VG 99 includes a function that apart from the patches stores the settings you like for each effects processor These are called Favorite Settings By storing the settings you like for each of a variety of effects processors you can then easily crea
337. ue to the high volume of MIDI messages O Reduce the volume of MIDI messages transmitted to the VG 99 MIDI OFFLINE RRC2 OFFLINE USB OFFLINE Transmissions from the connected device have been interrupted This message also appears when the power to the connected device has been turned off It does not indicate damage Q Check to make sure no cable is disconnected and that there are no shorts QUT OF RANGE SET AGAIN The D Beam controller or ribbon controller cannot be calibrated If using the D Beam controller change the range or position and recalibrate to keep this message from appearing If using the ribbon controller confirm the calibration by carrying out the procedure once more If the message continues to appear even after the calibration is correctly performed it may indicate damage or malfunction Consult your Roland dealer or contact Roland Service USB DEVICE ERROR Initialization of the VG 99 s internal USB device failed USB cannot be used The unit may be damaged Consult the nearest Roland service center Troubleshooting If the VG 99 is not producing sounds or if you think it is not operating properly first check the following points If checking these points fails to resolve the problem consult your dealer or the nearest Roland service center For more on the USB drivers and problems when using the drivers refer to the following f
338. ues in a consecutive manner is used to control a two value On Off parameter the controller functions as shown below Value Degree to Which Expression Pedal Is Depressed 0 When the pedal 127 is advanced halfwa When the pedal When the pedal is fully raised is fully advanced EXP Pedal 85 Chapter 8 Other Functions About the Range of Controllers Change This sets the operational range range in which the value actually changes for an expression pedal or similar controller that changes the value of a setting in a continuous fashion when it has been set as the source If the controller adjustment moves beyond the enabled range of operation the value of the setting remains at the maximum value or minimum value without changing any further Value Degree to Which Expression Pedal Is Depressed RANGE RANGE 127 LOW HIGH 4 If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Ifyou do not want to save press EXIT to return to the Play screen One Touch Call Up of Favorite Patches DIRECT PATCH You can assign your favorite patches to the DIRECT PATCH 1 DIRECT PATCH 5 buttons then call up these patches just by pressing the buttons Setting DIRECT PATCH 1 Press SYSTEM 2 Press PAGE lt 4 to go to Page 1 SYSTEM iT E win DIRECT EI HIDI 3 Press F2 DIRECT The DIRECT PATCH screen appears EE E Li DIR FATCH DIR PHTCH 11 2 V
339. ume is assigned as the GK volume control function the GK 3 s select switch will stop functioning normally Before Connecting To perform with the VG 99 first set up the following devices Aguitar on which the GK 3 has been installed or equipped with internal GK function Guitar amp speaker or headphones Performing can be made even more convenient using the following devices MIDI foot controller Roland FC 300 optional Expression pedal Roland EV 5 or BOSS FV 500L 500H with a connection cable stereo 1 4 phone stereo 1 4 phone optional Pedal switch BOSS FS 5U or FS 6 optional 15 Making the Connections Top Panel Roland GK cable Guitar with GK 3 GK 2A other GK Compatible guitar Rear Panel Stereo Headphones OC Rumi euuemXRHO OPS op SSS e eoo Digital Recorder etc MIDIIN Synthesizer external sound module etc Computer Mixer etc MIDI Sequencer etc MIDI IN g p MIDI OUT V LINK Compatible Device EDIROL MD P1 etc MIDI IN i Normal Guitar hi AC Adaptor PSB 1U RRC2 cable 2 H Guitar Amp EXP Pedal Footswitch Computer MID
340. usts the volume of the effect sound in the low frequency range HIGH RATE 0 100 Adjust the speed of the chorus effect for the BPM o BPM high frequency range When set to BPM the value of each parameter will be set according to the value of the BPM p 163 specified for each patch This makes it easier to achieve effect sound settings that match the tempo of the song If due to the tempo the time is longer than the range of allowable settings it is then synchronized to a period either 1 2 or 1 4 of that time HIGH DEPTH 0 100 Adjust the depth of the chorus effect for the high frequency range If you wish to use this as a doubling effect use a setting of 0 HIGH PREDLY High Pre Delay 0 0 ms 40 0 ms Adjusts the delay of the effect sound in the high frequency range Extending the pre delay will produce the sensation of multiple sounds doubling ef fect HIGH LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound in the high frequency range FX Effects Chapter 9 Parameters Guide ROTARY This produces an effect like the sound of a rotary speaker Parameter Explanation Range SPEED SLOW FAST This parameter changes the simulated speaker s rotating speed Slow or Fast RATE SLOW 0 100 This parameter adjusts the speed of rotation BPM BPM when set to Slow RATE FAST 0 100 This parameter adjusts the speed of rotation BPM 2 BPM when set
341. ut Level GUITAR INPUT 10 dBu Input Impedance GUITAR INPUT 2 2 M ohms Nominal Output Level MAIN OUT 10 dBu SUB OUT XLR 4 dBu GUITAR OUT 10 dBu Output Impedance MAIN OUT 1 k ohm SUB OUT XLR 600 ohms Dynamic Range 100 dB or greater IHF A Controls Top Panel OUTPUT LEVEL knob Function knobs x 6 F1 F6 BALANCE knob PATCH LEVEL knob V LINK button DIRECT PATCH buttons x 5 1 5 CONTROL buttons x 2 1 2 COSM GUITAR MODELING buttons x 2 A B COSM GUITAR ALTERNATE TUNING button POLY FX A B buttons x 2 A B FX buttons x 2 A B COSM AMP buttons x 2 A B MIXER buttons x 2 A B DELAY REVERB button DYNAMIC button CHAIN button CONTROL ASSIGN button NAME KEY BPM button 184 Function buttons x 6 1 6 EXIT button WRITE button PAGE buttons x 2 Left Right GUITAR TO MIDI button SYSTEM button GLOBAL button TUNER button CATEGORY button PATCH VALUE dial Power switch D BEAM D Beam Controller PITCH button FILTER button ASSIGNABLE button RIBBON CONTROLLER Ribbon Controller PITCH button FILTER button ASSIGNABLE button Rear Panel Ground Lift switch SUB OUT Display 240x64 dots graphic LCD with backlit Connectors Top Panel GK IN connector 13 pin DIN type Rear Panel GUITAR INPUT jack 1 4 phone type GUITAR OUTPUT jack 1 4 phone type SUB OUT jacks x 2 L R XLR type MAIN OUT jacks x 2 L MONO R 1 4 phone type PHONES jack Ster
342. ut level of each string Parameter Explanation MIX LEVEL COSM GUITAR 0 100 Specifies the level of the COSM GUITAR NORMAL PU Normal Pickup 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the normal pickup 115 Q gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide COSM GUITAR ALTERNATE TUNING With the Alternate Tuning function you can convert the pitch of each individual string of a COSM guitar without changing the guitar s actual tuning Alternate Tuning includes the five following functions TUNING BEND 12 STRING DETUNE HARMONY You can use all of these functions simultaneously in any combination TUNING This shifts the tuning of each string in semitone increments With the guitar left with the standard tuning EADGBE you can convert the tuning to an open tuning such as OPEN D or OPEN G raise or lower all of the strings an octave and achieve various other tunings all without changing the guitar s actual tuning When the type set in TUNING is something other than a preset tuning you can also create your own tunings as you like for each individual patch with the USER tunings Using the TUNING function allows you to change tunings instantly during songs without having to change instruments and perform using tunings that are easier to play in without changing the string tension BEND You can produce a pitch bend effect on any individual string or combination of string
343. utput Select esee 20 MIXGI e EA 25 Output Signal and Level eee 37 MIXER 24422 226 0 01 00001101301000 146 Overdrive Distortion 40 120 MIXER bbc cost ail 146 MIXER Buttons 12 MOD CI PUN MU 125 iu os dis esc a a 103 MOD 1 TYPE SUPRA 127 Button Vebesseesostoddectske tbe vedessbsscebsdeceleceeddbecacrsbevesvewens 13 MOD 2 TYPE mice uiis atum vimos 127 124 127 128 146 MOD DEPTH 114 125 PANEL CTLI CTL2 444 151 VS SE RP RENS 125 164 TUNE Paha Seon Stan Gta Roa gt tad a mre EE 1 14 COPY Pm meee eee merce ee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 MNA HN ROB NCMO 127 EXCHANGE esee 87 MODI SIM n de at se 127 EXTENT 50 176 INITIALIZE ife 88 PRE DELAY2 4 130 131 146 163 PREAMP TYPE 140 E 37 163 PRESENCE tir a 122 141 143 Pate ence eus 23 Preset Patches neces 23 PATCH LEVEL Knob
344. vel output to each output with PAGE lt gt or with the F1 F6 knobs cf gt For detailed information on the parameters that can be set refer to OUTPUT p 147 51 Chapter 5 Using the VG 99 in Combination with an FC 300 With an FC 300 optional connected to the VG 99 you can perform the following operations Switch patches Have patch names be shown the FC 300 s display Control tones with the FC 300 s pedals Control Assign Show the VG 99 s tuner in the FC 300 s display when the TUNER function is used e Switch the FC 300 s Amp Control and off Connecting with the RRC2 IN Connector Connect the VG 99 and FC 300 using the RRC2 cable included with the unit What is RRC2 RRC2 is a Roland protocol that provides for the supply of power and two way data communications over a single cable Devices can also be connected using a commercially available ethernet cable instead of the included RRC2 cable NOTE Be sure to connect the RRC2 OUT connector to a device with an RRC2 IN connector Use of the connection with LAN or other devices may cause generation of heat and damage to the equipment e Carefully connect the RRC2 cable the way in until it is firmly to the RRC2 IN connector Do not subject the RRC2 cable to stress or physical shock If using commercially available ethernet cable as the RRC2 connecting cable be sure that the cable meets the following spec
345. verdrive distor tion sound DIRECT LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound Parameter Exslanaton Range CUSTOM 1 This selects the basic sound when parameter is set to CUSTOM OD 1 This is the sound of the BOSS OD 1 OD 2 2 This is a overdrive sound with high gain CRUNCH This is a crunch sound DS 1 This gives a basic traditional distortion sound DS 2 This creates a heavier distortion sound METAL1 This is a metal sound with a characteristic midrange METAL2 This gives a heavy metal sound FUZZ This gives a basic traditional fuzz sound BOTTOM 50 50 This controls the input sound s low fre quency range and adjusts the amount of dis tortion in the low frequency range TOP 50 50 This controls the input sound s low fre quency range and adjusts the amount of dis tortion in the high frequency range LOW 50 50 Adjusts low range tones after distortion is applied HIGH 50 50 Adjusts the high range tones after distortion is applied 1 Setting available when TYPE is set to CUSTOM 121 gt o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide You control the wah effect in real time by adjusting the EXP pedal connected to the EXP PEDAL jack or FC 300 EXP pedal Parameter E Explanatio
346. vice Amp Connected to MAIN OUT Output 20 Inputting the Divided Pickup Settings GK Settings sss 21 Tuning the Guitar TUNER ieee orate iens iniiis etd er ri ene n rig ene fiie dee 22 Switching Tories Patch tede tete bb 23 About the Patch Numbers nennen ette tenente 23 Switching with the PATCH VALUE Dial ane eniin pini bo nerd be He tor priu irae dee 24 Turing Off the PoWer x ehe Rec diae t gere slated 24 Chapter 2 Creating SOUnds 25 Setting the COSM GUITAR Tone nennen rennes 25 Setting the Alternate Tuning nee ertet iere herren ie dere eed eee eee ie te 26 Settna ABILINE ieis eL bc eo calce chia D ER queni beaten Ra Rua 26 Setting TUNING e dad ki sedi aah aac cls Sta uals dta pr eine 27 Setting BEIND ete tede ta b e e eh 27 28 Setting UBER TUNING inrer eicit rte entren de LO em RR eroe bo to PH 29 29 Setting 30 Setting the COSM AMP Tone i Pe e hee in 3
347. vidual settings avail able for the left and right channels Delay 1 goes to the left channel Delay 2 to the right HIGH CUT High Cut Filter REVRSE This produces an effect where the sound is played back in reverse 700 Hz 11kHz FLAT This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high end component above the set frequency When it is set to FLAT the high cut filter is off or has no effect ANALOG This gives a mild analog delay sound The delay time can be set within the range of 1 to 1800 ms TAPE This setting provides the characteristic wa vering sound of the tape echo The delay time can be set within the range of 1 to 1800 ms WARP This simultaneously controls the delay sound s feedback level and volume to pro duce a totally unreal delay a FB DEPTH LEVEL DEPTH OUTPUT RISE TIME 123 Q 6 o Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Parameter Explanation Range MOD Modulate This delay adds a pleasant wavering effect to the sound HOLD Up to 2 8 seconds of performance content is recorded then played back repeatedly You can also layer this as you perform some thing else then record these together over dub allowing you to produce what is called sound on sound or looping For more detail the operation refer to Using the HOLD Hold Delay p 125 Ifyou switch patches with the TY
348. which you want to change the connection sequence with F1 A B 3 Press F2 SEL F3 SEL to select the effect COSM guitar or COSM amp to be shifted in the sequence The output level for the selected effect is indicated in the upper right of the screen 4 Press F4 XC MOVE F5 MOVE to move to the position in the sequence you want the shifted item inserted 5 To make any additional changes in the connection sequence repeat Steps 2 4 You can also switch effects COSM guitars and COSM amps on and off while setting the connection sequence Pressing F6 while the effect COSM guitar or COSM amp is selected switches the function s ON OFF setting Press EXIT to return to the Play screen If you want to save the edited settings perform the Write procedure p 38 Specifying the tempo and key of the song to be played Here s how to specify the tempo and key of a song you ll be playing Set these when you want to specify a delay time or rate that suits a song s tempo specifying it in terms of the note length and when using the HARMONY function Setting the Tempo 1 Press NAME KEY BPM NAME KEY BPM mm Jen E CIP ABCDEF 2 4 2 Press BPM 3 F1 in time with the song tempo quarter notes or adjust the tempo with the F1 knob Ifyou want to control a patch parameter with the adjust
349. xpression pedal to shift from the fully re leased position pedal toe raised to the fully depressed position pedal toe pressed down CURVE 2 This selects one of the three types that determines how the assumed expression pedal changes 1 You cannot set the MIN or MAX parameters when the TARGET parameter is set to one of the functions below The MIN parameter is fixed at 0 and the MAX parameter is fixed at 127 SCRICHSW BPMSYNC CLIPLOOP ABSW TAPSW DUALSTREAM 2 The TRIGGR TIME and CURVE parameters are enabled when the SOURCE parameter is set to INT PEDAL 3 The RATE and FORM parameters are enabled when the SOURCE parameter is set to WAVE PEDAL Although the target names indicated refer to EDIROL DV 7PR and motion dive tokyo it is Control Change messages that are actually transmitted For more on the correspondence between the target names and Control Change numbers refer to p 181 For more detailed information on the EDIROL DV 7PR and motion dive tokyo performance package refer to the Owner s Manuals for each product STRING CH String Channel Parameter Explanation Range 1st 6th Selects the channel to be controlled with each string OFF No channel is controlled A CH Channel A of the V LINK compatible device is controlled B CH Channel B of the V LINK compatible device is controlled C CH MIDI Note plug in is controlled LINEAR SLOW RISE FAST
350. y phrasing NASHVL With this tuning the 6th 5th 4th and 3rd strings are raised an octave just like having only the secondary string for these string pairs on a twelve string guitar 116 5 GUITAR Chapter 9 Parameters Guide Parameter Range Explanation 1 OCT This tuning lowers all the strings one octave 2 OCT This tuning raises all the strings one octave USER This assigns the tuning set in USER TUN ING USER TUNING 1st 6th 24 24 This sets the amount of shift for each indi vidual string BEND SW OFF ON This setting switches BEND function on and off BEND TUNING 1 st 6th 24 24 This sets the amount of pitch shift in each string when the bend is set to 100 The amount of shift from the current pitch is set in semitone increments BEND 0 100 When set to 0 bending causes no shift in the pitch when set to 100 the strings pitches are shifted by the amount set in 1st 6th Normally this pitch bend is set to 0 and the set ting 0 100 assigned with Control Assign is used This setting cannot be saved to patches This is reset to 0 when patches are switched 12STR 12 String SW OFF ON This setting switches 12STR function on and off SHIFT 1st 6th 24 24 This sets the amount the pitch that each sec ondary string is shifted relative to the re spective main string in semitone increments FINE 1st 6th
351. your hand or guitar neck over it You can apply various effects to the sound by changing the functions assigned to this controller Before using the D Beam controller you need to adjust its sensitivity Adjusting the D Beam CALIBRATION 76 1 Press the D BEAM PITCH FILTER or ASSIGNABLE button to switch the D Beam controller on The D Beam controller ON OFF setting is a patch parameter Carry out the Write procedure as required p 38 Available Settings Explanation You can use the T Arm function to control the guitar s pitch and the Freeze function to hold guitar sounds The PITCH effect is applied only to COSM guitars Use this with the COSM guitar volume raised p 33 You can change the tone using the D Beam controller The D Beam controller controls the function ASSIGNABLE assigned to it You can assign a variety of functions to the controller For instructions on how to set these functions and tones please read Using the Switches Pedals and MIDI to Control the Sounds CONTROL ASSIGN p 82 2 While you play the guitar to produce sound place your hand or guitar neck above the D Beam controller and move it slowly up and down Use of the D Beam ASSIGNABLE setting also enables detection horizontally left to right 3 The effect is applied to the sound in accordance with the function assigned to the D Beam controller The blue indicat
352. ystem provides unlimited possibilities in creating sounds 11 Two complete sound creation systems 114 1 Equipped with D Beam ribbon and other new realtime controllers 11 Console style accommodates a variety of usage 11 Combine with the FC 300 to create the perfect live system 11 Includes pitch MIDI conversion function 22 0000 11 Features V LINK function eese eere teens tt testata da hee 11 Names of Things and What They 12 sre de pO REINO RD HD E I EI etes 12 14 Chapter 1 Outputting 2 15 Installing the Divided Pickup teen nete nennen nennen nennt 15 Before Connecting inse n tese tu detiene f b bed Ea de Use ea it e efi ipe e Rete tui 15 Making the Connections sse nennen nente nene nent 16 Turning ener Irt eee dente eerie edere ee neo iet eene ted 18 Aboutthe Play Screen ee teet RE Ue CIR ERU Re err 19 About the Information in the Display Basic Operation sss 19 Adjusting the Volume tenete nene 20 Setting the De

Roland VG-99 Music Pedal User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents